WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 4
1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire -rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".
E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.
F. Product packaging to be labelled in compliance with CA Prop 65, Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation.
B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly m ark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work.
C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc.
D. Contractor to inventory door hardware jointly with representativ es of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each all are satisfied that count is correct.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale from day of final acceptance as follows:
1. Locksets: Three (3) years.
2. Exit devices: Three (3) years.
3. Closers: Thirty (30) years.
4. Automatic Operators: Two (2) years.
5. Electronic: One (1) year.
6. All other hardware: Two (2) years.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.
1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section.
B. Attendance: Arc hitect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware Supplier, Installer, Key Owner’s Personnel, and Project Inspector.
C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination required with related work. Review Owner's keying standards.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes
Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley, McKinney
Locks, Latches & Cylinders Schlage Or Approved Equal
Exit Devices Von Duprin Or Approved Equal
Closers LCN Or Approved Equal
Push, Pulls & Protection Plates Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Flush Bolts Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Coordinators Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Door Stops Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson Or Approved Equal
Thresholds Zero Pemko, National Guard
Seals & Bottoms Zero Pemko, National Guard
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hinges:
1. Provide hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
2. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:
a. Height:
1) Doors up to 42" wide: 4-1/2 inches.
2) Doors 43" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees. c. Number of Hinges: Provide 3 hinges per leaf to 7' -5" in height. Add one for each additional 2 feet in height.
3. Exterior out-swinging hinges shall be non -ferrous material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins.
4. Furnish non -removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out -swing doors and interior key lock doors with reverse bevels.
5. Provide hinges with electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Provide with sufficient number and wire gage to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.
Locate electric hinge at second hinge from bottom or nearest to electrified locking component.
B. Heavy Duty Mortise Locks and Latches: Schlage “L” Series as scheduled with “06” style lever and “A” style rose.
1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3 hour fire doors.
2. Provide locks manufactured from heavy gauge steel, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance.
3. Provide lock case that is multi -function and field reversible for handing without opening case.
4. Provide locks with standard 2 -3/4” backset with full 3/4” throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt with full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel.
5. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.
6. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 6
7. Indicators: Where specified, provide indicator above cylinder or eme rgency release for visibility while operating the lock that identifies an occupied/unoccupied status of the lock or latch.
8. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru -bolted levers with 2 -piece spindles.
9. Provide levers with vandal resistant technology as scheduled for use at abusive applications.
10. Provide electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. Where scheduled, provide switches and sensors integrated into the locks and latches. a. 12 or 24 volt DC auto-detecting operating capability. b. Selectable EL (fail safe) or EU (fail secure) operating mode via switch on chassis. c. 0.23A (230mA) maximum current draw.
d. 0.01A (10mA) holding current.
e. Modular request to exit (RX) switch.
C. Exit devices: Von Duprin as scheduled.
1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware.
2. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over 1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 standards.
3. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door hardware.
4. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. No plastic inserts are allowed in touchpads.
5. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide glass bead kits.
6. Provide flush end caps for exit devices.
7. Exit devices shall comply with CBC Section 11B -404.2.7 and shall be mounted between 34" and 44" above the finished floor surface.
8. Provide exit devic es UL certified to meet 5 lbs. maximum unlatching force requirements according to the CBC Section 11B-309.4.
9. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
10. Provide cylinder or hex-key dogging as specified at non fire-rated openings.
11. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application, highly corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.
12. Provide exit devices with deadlatching feature for security and for future addition of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements.
13. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on the project.
14. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes.
15. Provide electrified options as scheduled.
D. Closers: LCN as scheduled.
1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers. Stamp units with date of manufacture code.
2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high s trength cast iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.
3. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that door closers have completed over 10,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.4 standards.
4. Cylinder Body: 1-1/2” diameter with 3/4” diameter double heat-treated pinion journal.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 7
5. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120° F to -30° F.
6. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full ra nge of closer sizes, and providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and standards.
7. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper -proof, non-critical valves, with separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.
8. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-duty forged forearms for parallel arm closers.
9. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.
10. Provide door closers powder coated to match balance of door hardware. Powder coating finish shall be certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as described in ANSI/BHMA A156.4 and ASTM B117.
11. Provide special rust inhibitor (SRI) in highly corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.
12. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering with closer mounting.
E. Electro Mechanical Automatic Operators: LCN Senior Swing as scheduled.
1. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
2. Opening: Powered by DC motor working through reduction gears.
3. Closing: Spring force.
4. Manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closers: Not permitted.
5. Operation: Motor is off when door is in closing mode. Door can be manually operated with power on or off without damage to operator. Provide variable adjustments, including opening and closing speed adjustment.
6. Cover: Aluminum.
7. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold -open switch, push and go fun ction to activate power operator, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, hold -open delay adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with accessories, mats, and sensors.
8. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.
9. Provide hard -wired motion sensors and/or actuator switches for operation as specified.
Provide weather-resistant actuators at exterior applications.
10. Provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and parts/material recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic operator for each individual leaf. Actuators control both doors simultaneously at pairs. Sequence operation of exterior and vestibule doors with automatic operators to allow ingress or egress through both sets of openings as directed by Architect. Locate actuators, key switches, and other controls as directed by Architect.
11. Provide caution signs as described in ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
F. Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes:
1. Automatic flush bolts shall be of the low operating force design.
2. Provide top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by testing procedures.
3. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.
4. Manual flush bolts shall only be permitted on storag e or mechanical openings, as scheduled.
G. Door Stops:
1. Unless otherwise noted in hardware sets, provide floor type with appropriate fasteners.
Where floor type cannot be used, provide overhead type.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 8
2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition (CBC Section 11B-307).
3. Provide backing plate at wall framing behind wall type.
4. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field -changeable hold-open, friction a nd stop-only functions. Stop -only function shall be provided at fire-rated openings.
H. Protection Plates:
1. Provide kick, mop, and/or armor plates minimum of 0.050” thick, with four beveled edges.
Furnish with sheet metal or wood screws, finished to match plates.
2. Kick plates shall be sized 10" high and 2" less door width (LDW) at single doors and 10” high and 1” LDW at pairs or doors.
3. Provide mop and armor plates with sizes as scheduled in hardware sets.
I. Thresholds: As scheduled and per details.
1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope .
Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.5.
2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl -rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”.
3. Use 1/4” fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL).
J. Seals: Provide silicone gasketing at all rated and exterior doors.
1. Smoke & Draft Control Doors : Provide UL10C Classified gasketing that complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252 for use on “S” labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.
K. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.
2.3 KEYING
A. Furnish a Proprietary Schlage masterkey system as directed by the owner or architect. Key system to be designated and combinated by the Schlage Master Key Department even if pinned by the Authorized Key Center, Authorize d Security Center or a local authorized commercial dealer.
B. A detailed keying schedule is to be prepared by the owner and/or architect in consultation with a representative of Allegion or an Authorized Key Center or Authorized Security Center. Each keyed cylinder on every keyed lock is to be listed separately showing the door #, key group (in BHMA terminology), cylinder type, finish and location on the door.
C. Furnish all cylinders in the Schlage Full Size Interchangeable Core (FSIC) style. Pack change keys independently (PKI).
D. Furnish construction keying for doors requiring locking during construction.
E. Furnish all keys with visual key control.
1. Stamp key “Do Not Duplicate”.
2. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on key.
3. Stamp unique owner identifier from the key bow.
F. Furnish all cylinders with visual key control.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 9
1. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on side of cylinder (CKC).
G. Furnish mechanical keys as follows:
1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.
2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.
3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set.
4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set.
5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders.
6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.
H. Furnish Schlage Padlocks and the cylinders to tie them into the masterkey system for gates, storage boxes, utility valve security, roof hatches and roll-up doors keyed as directed in the keying schedule.
1. Furnish KS43F3200 padlock for use with FSIC Schlage cylinders. Furnish 23-030 (FSIC core) or 20-740 (Primus core) with above.
I. Furnish one Schlage cabinet lock for each cabinet door or drawer so designated on the drawings or keying schedule to match the masterkey system.
1. Furnish CL777R for use with FSIC Schlage cylinders.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Generally to be satin chrome US26D (626 on bronze and 652 on steel) unless otherwise noted.
B. Furnish push plates, pull plates and kick or armor plates in satin stainless steel US32D (630) unless otherwise noted.
C. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.
D. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, co untersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.
B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.
C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish.
D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.
E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.
F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.
G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.
B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
C. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, all fire door assemblies shall be inspected to confirm proper operation of the closing device and latching device and that on ly the manufacturer’s furnished fasteners are used for installation and that it meets all criteria of a fire door assembly per NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives). A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to the Owne r to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The inspection of the swinging fire doors shall be performed by a certified FDAI (Fire Door Assembly Inspector) with knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being subjected to the inspection.
The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the project and include each door number, an itemized list of hardware set components at each door opening, and each door location in the facility.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI.
B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by DHI. Operating hardware shall be located between 34" and 44" above finish floor to comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.7.
D. Door Closers:
1. Place door closers inside building, stairs, room s, etc. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees or maximum allowable by conditions.
2. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to hinged doors.
3. When fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs. when specifically approved by fire marshal.
4. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position.
5. Compensating devices or automatic door operators may be utilized to meet the above standards.
6. Per CBC Section 11B-404.2.8.1, doors shall take minimum of 5 seconds to move from an open position of 90 degrees to 12 degrees to the latch jamb.
E. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
F. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
G. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 11
H. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost.
I. Electronic Hardware:
1. Hardware Installer shall coordinate with security contractor to route cable to connect electrified locks, panic hardware and fire exit hardware to power transfers or electric hinges at the time these items are installed so as to avoid d isassembly and reinstallation of hardware.
2. Hardware Installer shall also be present with the security contractor when the power is turned on for the testing of the electronic hardware applications. Installer shall make adjustments to solenoids, latches, v ertical rods and closers to insure proper and secure operation.
3. All wiring for electro-mechanical hardware mounted on the door shall be connected through the power transfer and terminated in the interface junction box specified for in the Electrical Section.
4. Conductors shall be minimum 18 gage stranded, multicolored. A minimum 12 in. loop of conductors shall be coiled in the interface junction box. Each conductor shall be permanently marked with its function.
5. If a power supply is specified in the har dware sets, all conductors shall be terminated in the power supply. Make all connections required for proper operation between the power supply and the electro -mechanical hardware. Provide the proper size conductors as specified in the manufacturer’s technical documentation.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.
B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.
C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.
E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures.
Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.
3.4 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2; and ADA Standards; and the drawings for access -compliant positioning requirements for the disabled.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 12
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor is responsible for providing the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or a proprietary product technician to inspect installation and certify that hardware and its installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and as specified herein.
3.6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specifications.
B. While the hardware schedule is intended to cover all doors, and other movable parts of the building, and establish type and standard of quality, the contractor is responsible for examining the Plans and Specifi cations and furnishing proper hardware for all openings whether listed or not. If there are any omissions in hardware groups in regard to regular doors they shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening for instruction; otherwise, list will be considered Complete. No extras will be allowed for omissions.
C. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door.
MANUFACTURERS ABBREVIATIONS
ACC = Accurate Lock Barn Door Locks
GLY = Glynn-Johnson Overhead Door Stops
IVE = Ives Hinges, Door Pulls, Door Stops & Kick Plates JOH = Johnson Hardware Sliding Door Hardware
LCN = LCN Door Closers & Automatic Operators
SCH = Schlage Lock Locks, Latches & Cylinders
VON = Von Duprin Exit Devices
ZER = Zero International Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping
HW GROUP NO. 01
For use on Door #(s):
I19 (DBL. EAST EXIT)
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 613 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE PA-9827-L-DT-06 313 VON
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE PA-9827-L-NL-06 313 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX 613 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 613 SCH
2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 100S 613 GLY
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER RE-USE EXISTING
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
2 EA MEETING STILE 328D D ZER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39D D ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD RE-USE EXISTING
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 13
HW GROUP NO. 02
For use on Door #(s):
11 (DBL. SOUTH ENTRANCE)
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QEL-PA-9847-L-DT-06 24 VDC 626 VON 1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QEL-PA-9847-L-NL-06 24 VDC 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 ICX 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
2 EA OVERHEAD STOP 90S 630 GLY
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA AA ZER
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
2 EA MEETING STILE 328AA AA ZER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD STOP STRIP 1842APK AL PEM
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS 120/240 VAC VON
CARD READER BY CITY VENDOR
RE-USE BALANCE OF EXISTING
HARDWARE
HW GROUP NO. 03
For use on Door #(s):
B05B (BASEMENT STORAGE)
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE
1 EA EU MORTISE LOCK L9092JEU 06A RX 12/24 VDC 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER RE-USE EXISTING
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
CARD READER BY CITY VENDOR
POWER SUPPLY BY CITY VENDOR
Note: Adjust existing closers per section 3.2.D
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 14
HW GROUP NO. 04
For use on Door #(s):
B11 (BASEMENT JANITOR)
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80JD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 HCUSH 689 LCN
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
HW GROUP NO. 05 – NOT USED
HW GROUP NO. 06
For use on Door #(s):
B05A (BASEMENT STORAGE CLOSET)
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA MANUAL FLUSH BOLT FB51T 630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80JD RHO 626 SCH
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030 626 SCH
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 90S (ON LEFT-HAND LEAF) 689 GLY
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436 (ON RIGHT-HAND LEAF) 626 IVE
2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
HW GROUP NO. 07
For use on Door #(s):
B04 (BASEMENT
OFFICE)
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 90S 689 GLY
RE-USE BALANCE OF EXISTING
HARDWARE
Note: Adjust existing closers per section 3.2.D
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR HARDWARE 231116 08 71 00 – 15
HW GROUP NO. 08
For use on Door #(s):
201 (ROOFTOP GATE)
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA GATE HINGE BY MECH. SCREEN MFR.
1 EA PADLOCK LATCH CUSTOM FABRICATION
END OF SECTION 08 71 00
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
VISION CONTROL GLAZING 08 88 16 – 1
SECTION 08 88 16 – VISION CONTROL GLAZING
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:
1. Vision control glass (sealed integral blinds) systems for glazing of doors and windows.
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. ASTME E-773-81 "Standard Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units" and ASTME E-774-81 "Standard Specification for Sealed Insulated Glass Units", level CBA.
B. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The installation of VISION CONTROL shall be executed in strict conformity with the appro ved shop drawings. These drawings shall clearly indicate complete installation details.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM C 1087, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants:
B. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual."
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Vision Control Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace control vision glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of sealed glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Vision Control for Hinged Doors and Vision Control Mini for sliding doors.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
VISION CONTROL GLAZING 08 88 16 – 2
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product as indicated or comparable product as indicated:
1. Vision Control Panel as manufactured by:
a. Unicel Architectural, 800-668-1580, www.unicelarchitectural.com.
C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated above or comparable product by one of the following:
1. The IE Blind System as manufactured by Pariluse LLC, Contact: Pariluse, LLC 866 267- 1917. www.ieblinds.com
2.2 MATERIALS - GLASS
A. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select, Kind FT fully tempered.
2.3 MATERIALS - LOUVERS, FRAMES, AND OPERATORS
A. Louvers: Hollow extruded aluminum, interlocking profile, 1/4 inch thick x 1-3/8 inches deep; Duracron K-1285 Glossy White finish
B. Louvers: Hollow extruded aluminum, interlocking profile, 3/16 inch thick x 7/8 inch deep; Duracron K-20794 Metallic Gray finish.
C. Manual Operators:
1. Dual control: accessible from both sides of door or window. a. Anti-ligature knob type, typical at hinged doors and windows. b. Aluminum knob, at sliding doors (where indicated).
c. Location: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Single control: accessible from one sides of door or window. a. Anti-ligature knob type, typical at hinged doors and windows. b. Aluminum knob, at sliding doors (where indicated).
c. Location: As indicated on Drawings.
D. Glass Frame (Trim Kit): Extruded aluminum, factory glazed, sized to accept 1-3/4 inch thick glass for insertion into 1-3/4 inch thick doors; Duracron K-1285 Glossy White finish.
1. Locations: Hinged flush wood panel doors and hallow metal window frames, as indicated on Door Schedule.
E. Glass Frame (Trim Kit): Extruded aluminum, sized to accept 1-5/16 inch thick glass for insertion into 1-3/4 inch thick sliding doors; clear anodized finish.
1. Locations: Aluminum sliding ICU/CCU doors, as indicated on Door Schedule.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
VISION CONTROL GLAZING 08 88 16 – 3
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C1115, silicone; 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness.
B. Spacers: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C1115, silicone; 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness.
C. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864, neoprene or EPDM, or ASTM C1115, silicone or thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, molded or extruded shape to fit glazing channel retaining slot.
D. Glazing Sealant:
1. ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; single component [polysulfide] [silicone] type, low modulus, non sag.
E. Sealant backing: ASTM C1330, Type O, size and density to control glazing sealant depth and produce optimum glazing sealant performance.
F. Compatible with glass unit edge seals; tested to ASTM C1294.
2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.
EXECUTION
3.1 GLAZING
A. General: Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.
1. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.
2. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.
3. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
4. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
5. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. Protect glass from contact with contaminating
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
VISION CONTROL GLAZING 08 88 16 – 4
substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
END OF SECTION 08 88 16
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR LOUVERS 08 91 26 – 1
SECTION 08 91 26 – DOOR LOUVERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes formed-metal door louvers.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 08 11 13 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.
C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Sample warranties.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees t o repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIXED FORMED-METAL LOUVERS
A. Door Louver
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR LOUVERS 08 91 26 – 2
1. 800 Series, by Air Louver a division of Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. , or equal.
2. Louver Depth: 1 inch.
3. Blade Profile: Inverted Y .
4. Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: 20ga cold rolled steel
5. Frame: 18ga cold rolled steel, 2-Piece frame with 1 .25inch high, mitered corners and welded, with pre-punched mounting holes for attachment to door on secure side of door.
6. Fasteners: Flathead phillips drive SMS, #8 by 0.75inch; finish to match frames.
7. Finish: provide standard color selection for review
8. Performance:
Type 1 : Not less than 1.00 Square Foot of net free area.
Type 2: Not less than 1.70 Square Feet of net free area.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and p erimeter sealant joints.
B. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet , as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.
C. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.
D. Protect unpainted galvanized - and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and ga lvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction, so no evidence remains of corrective work. If r esults of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOOR LOUVERS 08 91 26 – 3
END OF SECTION 08 91 19
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 – 1
SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions.
2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Evaluation reports for firestop tracks.
PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS
A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.
2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.
B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1. Steel Studs and Runners:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2) Custom Stud.
3) MBA Building Supplies.
4) MRI Steel Framing, LLC.
5) Phillips Manufacturing Co.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 – 2
b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Unless noted otherwise, 0.033 inch (20 gauge) for runners and vertical studs up to 15’-0” unbraced height, assuming minimum lateral loads for interior partitions of 5 psf with a maximum deflection of L/240, (L/360 at walls with tile) spacing at 16”o.c. Increase stud gauge for increased spans as required complying with the manufacturers load tables. Provide 0.043 inch (18 gauge) for tracks at top of walls which terminate at ceilings. Increase stud gauges at framed openings as indicated on Drawings.
c. Refer to Drawings for addition framing requirements and metal stud thickness at openings, jambs, heads, and other areas requiring increase structural performance.
d. “EQ” (Equivalent Gauge Thickness) Steel Studs and Runners: Members that can show certified third party testing with gypsum board in accordance with ICC ES AC86 (Approved May 2012) need not meet the minimum thickness limitation or minimum section properties set forth in ASTM C 645. The submission of an evaluation report is acceptable to show conformance to this requirement.
C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:
1. Clip System: Clips designed for use in head-of-wall deflection conditions that provide a positive attachment of studs to runners while allowing 1-1/2-inch minimum vertical movement.
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
3) Fire Trak Corp.
2. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.
3. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.
4. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1) Blazeframe Industries.
2) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
3) ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
4) MBA Building Supplies.
5) Metal-Lite.
6) Perfect Wall, Inc.
D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 – 3
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Blazeframe Industries.
b. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
c. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
d. Fire Trak Corp.
e. Metal-Lite.
E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.053 inch (16 gauge).
F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.
2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel.
G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
2. Depth: 7/8 inch.
H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.
1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.
1. Depth: 3/4 inch.
2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated- steel thickness of 0.0329 inch.
3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.
2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire.
B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:
1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength design capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488/E 488M conducted by a qualified testing agency.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 – 4
2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greater than or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.
C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.
D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.
E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges.
1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches.
F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):
1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.
2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
b. Depth: As required.
3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch.
4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.
a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.
G. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
C. Acoustical Isolation Strips under interior walls bearing on concrete: Provide the following:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 – 5
1. Foam Sound Attenuation Gasket: Adhesive-backed, rubber strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 5 mm thick, in width to suit steel stud size. a. Basis-of-Design Product: ISO-SILL SILL Plate Isolation by AcoustiGuard Sound & Vibration Control (www.acoustiguard.com)
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.
B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securel y fastened.
C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. Refer to Drawings for typical framing at openings.
b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside o f overhead structure.
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 – 6
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.
a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated.
5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.
6. Curved Partitions:
a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.
E. Direct Furring:
1. Screw to wood framing.
2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
F. Z-Shaped Furring Members:
1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.
2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.
3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.
G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.
B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.
C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 – 7
system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.
5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.
6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.
7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.
8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.
D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.
E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.
F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.
END OF SECTION 09 22 16
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 – 1
SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Interior gypsum board.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicated for Work.
PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.
2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Certainteed AirRenew Essential.
2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
3. Long Edges: Tapered.
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1. Certainteed AirRenew Essential Type X
2. USG Sheetrock Brand Ecosmart Panels Firecode X.
3. Gold Bond XP Fire-Shield Gypsum Board.
4. Gold Bond High Strength Fire-Shield Lite.
5. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
6. Long Edges: Tapered.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 – 2
2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. USG Sheetrock and Beadex Metal Beads.
3. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.
2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B. Joint Tape:
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. USG Sheetrock and Beadex Brand Joint Tape or approved equal.
3. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper.
4. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.
5. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. USG Sheetrock Brand All Purpose Joint Compound, Easy Sand, or Plus 3 Joint Compound or approved equal.
2. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.
3. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 – 3
4. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
5. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.
6. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications:
1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound.
2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.
E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:
1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.
2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.
1. Henkel/OSI F38 Drywall and Panel Adhesive.
2. LiquidNails DWP-24.
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.
1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.
D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the following:
a. Owens Corning Thermafiber Mineral Wool Insulation–Formaldehyde Free-Unfaced.
E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
1. Henkel/OSI SC175 Acoustical Sealant.
2. Tremco Tremflex 834.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 – 4
F. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 "Thermal Insulation." G. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 26 00 "Vapor Retarders."
EXECUTION
3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
B. Comply with ASTM C 840.
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
E. Prefill open joints, beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.
F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.
G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile.
3. Level 3: At panel surfaces not exposed to view.
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
5. Level 5: As indicated on the Drawings.
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting."
H. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.
I. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
J. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold dama ged.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 – 5
END OF SECTION 09 29 00
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 – 1
SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For seismic restraints for ceiling systems.
1. Include design calculations for seismic restraints including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.
B. Product test reports.
C. Research reports.
D. Field quality-control reports.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems.
B. Seismic Performance: Suspended ceilings shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 – 2
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS (ACP)
A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264.
C. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as indicated by manufacturer's designation..
D. Color: As indicated in a schedule.
E. Edge/Joint Detail: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.
F. Thickness: As indicated in schedule.
G. Modular Size: As indicated in schedule.
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Chicago Metallic Corporation.
3. Rockfon North America
4. USG Corporation.
B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M.
C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel or aluminum.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
6. Product: As indicated in Finished Schedule on Drawings.
7. Location: As indicated in Finished Schedule on Drawings.
D. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.
4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel or aluminum.
5. Cap Finish: Painted white.
6. Product: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
7. Location: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 – 3
E. Clean Room Grid, Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.
1. Available Products:
a. Clean Room 15/16-inch by Armstrong
b. USG Donn® Brand CE™ 15/16" by USG
2. Color: White and match the actual color of the selected ceiling tile, unless noted otherwise.
3. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system.
4. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.
5. Face Design: Flat, flush.
6. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel.
7. Cap Finish: Painted white.
8. Gasket: Integral gasket system.
9. Clips: Hold down clips.
10. Location: As indicated on Drawings.
11. Edge Molding and Trim to be EA7813 Molding Clean Room 12 foot, 15/16 Angle.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
B. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down.
C. Impact Clips: Manufacturer's standard impact-clip system designed to absorb impact forces against acoustical panels.
D. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.
E. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.
F. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed to secure acoustical panels in place during a seismic event.
1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 7/8-inch perimeter trim with seismic edge clip molding by one of the following:
a. ACM 7 by USG/Donn
b. Chicago Metallic 1496 by Rockfon.
c. Seismic RX (BERC2) by Armstrong.
2. Seismic Joint Clips; Manufacturer’s standard cross tee joint clip.
2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 – 4
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
2. Gordon, Inc.
3. Rockfon North America
4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.
B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.
2.6 DECORATIVE PERIMETER TRIM
A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. Axiom Transition Trim by Armstrong
2. Profile Size: 2 inches to 16 inches as required for transition as indicated on Drawings.
3. Transition Trim (AX_STR) classic and drywall-to-acoustical, where indicated.
4. Corners: Field cut or factory mitered corners. Field assembled using AXIOM splice plate bent to desired angle.
5. Finish & Color: Factory-applied baked polyester paint finish.
6. Color: Match ceiling grid.
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated.
B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M, seismic design requirements, and manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.
2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
3. Install hold-down, impact and seismic clips in areas indicated; space according to panel manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension -system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit.
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 – 5
2. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension-system runners and moldings.
3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.
4. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush with bottom face of runners.
5. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform inspections.
1. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids according to ASCE/SEI 7.
3.4 CLEANING
1. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09 51 13
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT AN-23016
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 11.30.2023
11.30.2023 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 -1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes resilient floor coverings and related work as shown and specified.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data, installation instructions and evidence of compliance with requirements for every material and accessory proposed in this section.
B. Samples: Submit 2 minimum 2 x 2-inch samples for each color specified C. Installer Qualifications: Provide evidence that installers meet the requirements of Article 1.5.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1.4 O & M MANUALS: MAINTENANCE AND CLEANING INSTRUCTIONS.GUARANTEE: PROVIDE COMPLETED FORM PER ARTICLE 1.6. EXTRA STOCK: FURNISH EXTRA FULL-SIZE RUBBER FLOORING EQUAL TO 1% OF QUANTITY INSTALLED THAT MATCH PRODUCTS INSTALLED AND THAT
ARE PACKAGED WITH PROTECTIVE COVERING FOR STORAGE AND IDENTIFIED WITH LABELS DESCRIBING CONTENTS.DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended in writing by manufacturer, but not less than 65 degrees F for 48 hours before, during and after installation.
B. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer certified by manufacturer.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each rubber floor covering from a single manufacturer.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:
1. Critical Radiant Flux; per ASTM E648: Class A.
2. Smoke-Developed Index; per ASTM E662: 450 or less. NFPA 256 D. Slip resistance ASTM D2047 Static Coefficient of friction, Neolite dry .93 Neolite wet .90 > .5 is required WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT AN-23016
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 11.30.2023
11.30.2023 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 -2
E. Bacteria Resistance ASTM E2180 and ASTM G21, resistant to bacteria, fungi and micro-organism activity
F. All adhesives, leveling compounds, and game line paints shall comply with the VOC limits set forth in the California Green Building Standards Code, Title 24 Part 11.
G. GUARANTEE
H. Provide manufacturer’s standard 5 year limited warranty for wear, defect, bond, and conductivity PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING FORHEAVY TRAFFIC
A. Acceptable Products:
B. Other acceptable manufacturers: Mondo America Inc.Tarkettor equalAlternate Products: Proposed equals are subject to substitution process per Section 01 33 00 - PRODUCT SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
C. Installation Method: Adhered.
D. Moisture Vapor Emission Limits: Flooring system capable of adhering to substrate with up to 5.0pounds of water per 24 hours per 1,000 square feet.
E. Roll Size: Not less than 4’-0” wide by longest length that is practical to minimize splicing during installation.
F. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
2.2 ADHESIVE
A. Comply with VOC limits set forth above.
B. Acceptable Products: acrylic AC100 Adhesive, as manufactured by norasystems With high moisture, use Dry fiz tape according to manufacturer’s instructions
C. Alternate Products: proposed equals are subject to substitution process per Section 01 33 00 - PRODUCT SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
2.3 LEVELING AND PATCHING COMPOUND
A. Comply with VOC limits set forth above.
B. Leveling and Patching Compounds:
1. Ardex V 1200 or K10, as manufactured by Ardex Engineered Cements.
2. VAP I Level Pro, as manufactured by Koester American.
3. Or equal
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT AN-23016
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 11.30.2023
11.30.2023 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 -3
C. Leveling and Patching Compound Primer:
1. Ardex P 51, as manufactured by Ardex Engineered Cements.
2. Level-Pro Primer E, as manufactured by Koester American.
3. Or equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Verify that substrates conform to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure compatibility with flooring system and adhesion of floor coverings.
B. Take field measurements; report variance between plan and field dimensions.
C. Coordinate flooring installation with University’s anhydrous calcium chloride testing to determine if installation of water vapor emission control system at concrete floor slabs is necessary. Refer to Section 01 45 29 – TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
E. Resllient flooring to be installed 28 days minimum after concrete installation.
F. Concrete Substrates: Per manufacturer’s instructions. Prepare substrate according to ASTM F710 and manufacturer instructions
G. Use leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
H. The prepared substrate must be smooth and ridge free. Use an appropriate patching compound or self - leveling underlayment following the manufacturer’s instructions. Patching or unde rlayment compounds must be moisture, mildew, and alkali-resistant. The compounds must provide a minimum of 3000 psi compressive strength when tested in accordance with ASTM C109/C109M Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars - Using 2-in or 50mm Cube Specimens or ASTM C472 Standard Test Method for Physical Testing of Gypsum, Gypsum Plasters and Gypsum Concrete I. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in conformance with referenced standards, manufacturer's written directions, as shown, and as specified.
B. Apply leveling and patching compound primer.
C. Install leveling and patching compound.
D. The installation area must be fully enclosed, weather tight, and climate controlled between 63°F and 75°F and 40% to 60% ambient relative humidity (RH) for at least 48 hours prior, during and 72 hours after WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT AN-23016
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS 11.30.2023
11.30.2023 RESILIENT FLOORING
09 65 00 -4
installation (do not use gas fueled blowers). Dew point must be avoided. The substrate must be at least 5°F above dew point to be considered acceptable.
E. Unroll sheet floor coverings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.
F. Scribe, cut, and fit floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, equipment anchors, floor outlets, and other interruptions of floor surface.
G. Lay out rubber flooring to minimize number of seams. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction and match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams. Avoid cross seams.
H. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.
I. Adhere products to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate.
J. Use lightweight 100 pound roller to eliminate entrapped air.
K. Weight all seams, perimeter and edges with 2 x 4 x 8 inches concrete utility bricks for 12 hours.
L. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation and for 48 hours after floor covering installation.
M. Chemical-use, wash areas or other areas where liquids are used or stored shall have watertight flooring.
Provide seam sealed, non-pervious, onepiece flooring. Flooring is required under fixed floor cases and cabinets
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste and debris. At completion of installation remove surplus materials and debris.
B. Remove and recycle excess material as required by the Construction Waste Management Plan, Section 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT.
C. At completion clean exposed surfaces in a manner that will not damage finish.
D. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 09 65 16
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 – 1
SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermoplastic-rubber base.
2. Rubber molding accessories.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
PRODUCTS
2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE
A. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic).
1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous).
2. Style and Location:
a. Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet.
b. Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient floor coverings. c. Style D, Sculptured: Provide in areas indicated.
1) Profile: As indicated.
C. Thickness: 0.125 inch.
D. Height: As indicated on Drawings.
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F. Outside Corners: Job formed.
G. Inside Corners: Job formed.
H. Colors: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings. .
2.2 RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY
A. Description: Rubber reducer strip for resilient floor coveringand transition strips.
B. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 – 2
C. Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated.
D. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in Finish Schedule.
2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated.
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.
B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F 710.
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of Insert rate in 24 hours.
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.
3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 – 3
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.
G. Job-Formed Corners:
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length.
a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints.
3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.
B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09 65 13
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 – 1
SECTION 09 68 13 - TILE CARPETING
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
1. Section includes:
a. Modular walk-off carpet tile.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Recycled Content: Submit manufacturer’s recycled content information identifying percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product.
2. Submit Declare Label, manufacturer’s complete list of chemical ingredients, or Health Product Declaration to 1000 ppm for carpet tile.
3. Submit Environmental Product Declaration.
4. Low-Emitting Materials:
a. Submit manufacturer’s product data for all site-applied adhesives, adhesive primers, sealants, sealant primers, paints and coatings indicating VOC content in grams per liter,
b. Submit VOC emissions testing compliant with requirements for all adhesives, adhesive primers, sealants, sealant primers, paints and coatings wet-applied to the interior of the building.
c. Submit VOC emissions testing compliant with requirements for all flooring products.
C. Shop Drawings: For carpet tile installation, plans showing the following:
1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.
2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot.
3. Pattern type, location, and direction.
4. Type, color, and location of insets and borders.
5. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.
6. Transition details to other flooring materials.
D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture required.
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product test reports.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 – 2
B. Sample warranty.
C. Certificates: Provide certificate of proof from manufacturer that carpet is eligible for recycling to an existing operational third party certified recycling center. Submit program parameters.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
B. Extra Stock: Provide extra stock materials from original dye lots, for use in facility operations and maintenance, 1% of the total floor surface for each color, surface texture and format of Manufactured Products.
C. Warranty.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum of 3 years of experience on similar work; knowledge and understanding of standards referenced herein, and the skill necessary to perform in compliance with this specification. Installers failing to demonstrate the required experience, knowledge, or skill shall be removed from the project.
B. Sustainable Design Requirements:
1. Carpet tile shall have Health Product Declaration to 1000 ppm or Environmental Product Declaration.
2. All site-applied adhesives, adhesive primers, sealers, sealant primers, paints and coatings shall comply with the VOC limits and VOC emissions testing certification set forth in Section 01 81 13.14 “Sustainable Design Requirements LEED V4 BD+C.”
3. All flooring shall comply with the VOC emissions testing certification set forth in Section 01 81 13.14 “Sustainable Design Requirements LEED V4 BD+C.”
4. Carpet tile shall be minimum Gold level certification according to ANSI/NSF 140.
C. Moisture Resistance: Carpet system must be guaranteed to bond to floor slab with moisture vapor emission 5 pounds per 1000 square feet in 24 hours as measured by ASTM F 1869-98, anhydrous calcium chloride test.
D. Recyclability: Carpet must be eligible for recycling by the supplying mill or fiber producer to an existing operational third party certified recycling center.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s warranty that products are to be free from defects in materials and workmanship, for surface wear, edge ravel, zippering, resiliency, loss of backing, and delamination of secondary backing for 25 years beginning at date of acceptance by University.
1. Bleach resistance warranty: 15 years.
2. Stain resistance warranty: 15 years.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 – 3
PRODUCTS
2.1 WALK OFF CARPET TILES (WO1)
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to the Basis of Design products indicated in the Drawings:
1. Basis of Design: Frixtion – Inertia, as manufactured by Mannington Commercial; CRI Green Label Plus, EPD, HPD, recycled content. Or equal.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.
C. Flammability: Critical Radiant Flux: Class II; Smoke: 450; Surface Flammability: complies with CPSC FF 1-17.
D. Yarn: Solution Q nylon, post-consumer type 6 nylon, or type 6-6 nylon
2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Subject to sustainable design requirements, latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B. Carpet Tile Adhesives: Subject to sustainable design requirements, 4mil double-faced adhesive membrane tabs with polyester film backing. Adhesive to be pressure sensitive, resalable from carpet tile manufacturer.
1. Basis of Design: FreLock Tabs with Premium Universal Primer, as manufactured by Mannington Commercial. Or equal
C. Walk-off Carpet Tile Adhesives: Subject to sustainable design requirements, water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
1. Basis of Design: Infinity, as manufactured by Mannington Commercial. Or equal D. Edging Strips: Subject to sustainable design requirements: Rubber, of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints, unless noted otherwise.
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Concrete Slabs:
1. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 1000 sq. ft., and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas.
a. Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test: ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 8 lb of water/1000 sq. ft.in 24 hours.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 – 4
b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.
c. Chemical pH of concrete slab to be 10 or less.
d. Perform additional moisture tests recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.
D. Metal Substrates: Clean grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.
E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D. Maintain pile-direction patterns recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer or as indicated on Drawings.
E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built -in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.
H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TILE CARPETING 09 68 13 – 5
I. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09 68 13
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 – 1
SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates.
1. Concrete.
2. Cement board.
3. Steel and iron.
4. Galvanized metal.
5. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).
6. Gypsum board.
7. Plaster.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
B. MPI Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
C. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
D. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
E. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
F. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
G. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.
1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Submit Declare Label, Health Product Declaration to 1,000 ppm, or complete chemical ingredients list.
2. Submit Environmental Product Declaration.
3. Low-Emitting Materials:
a. Submit manufacturer’s product data for all paints and coatings indicating VOC content in grams per liter,
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 – 2
b. Submit VOC emissions testing compliant with requirements for all adhesives, adhesive primers, sealants, sealant primers, paints and coatings wet-applied to the interior of the building.
C. Samples: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to University B. Reference Standards:
1. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.
2. National Paint and Coatings Association (NPCA): Guide to U.S. Government Paint Specifications.
3. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA): Painting - Architectural Specifications Manual.
4. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): Steel Structures Painting Manual
1.5 GUARANTEE
a. Provide in required form for a period of 1 year from date of final acceptance by University. Color and finish appearance shall remain unchanged throughout entire guarantee period
PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to following:
1. Basis of Design: Sherwin Williams
2. Dunn-Edwards.
3. Benjamin Moore
4. PPG.
5. Or equal
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 – 3
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products listed in the Interior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL
A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."
B. Material Compatibility:
1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
C. Sustainable Design Requirements:
1. Paints and primers shall have a Declare Label, Health Product Declaration to 1,000 ppm, or a complete chemical ingredients list.
D. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range E. Container Identification: Identify container with manufacturer's name, and include description of type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code and color designation.
F. Paint Materials:
1. General: Provide ready mixed products, except field catalyzed coatings. Provide accessory materials such as linseed oil, shellac, thinners, cleaners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified.
2. Patching Material: Bondex latex filler.
3. Caulking Compound: Acrylic Latex manufactured by Tremco Inc., or approved equal.
G. Primers, Paints and Stains: Refer to Paint Schedules at end of this section for specific product requirements.
2.3 MIXING
A. General: Mix paints at the factory; do not alter or reduce materials except as directed by manufacturer.
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:
1. Concrete: 12 percent.
2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 – 4
3. Wood: 15 percent.
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
5. Plaster: 12 percent.
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.
D. Backprime all wood installed against steel, concrete, plaster or tile and all wood with surfaces exposed in exterior locations.
E. A single color matching walls and ceilings shall be used on all surfaces. Visible surfaces behind vents, grills, etc., shall be painted flat black. Insides of all drawers, shelves inside cabinets, and other wood surfaces where scheduled or noted shall be given one coat of clear gloss lacquer.
F. Prime coats and finish coats for any 1-paint system shall be the products of the same manufacturer.
G. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
C. Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section.
D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
E. Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressure water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.
F. Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify that required acid-alkali balance has been achieved. Allow to dry.
G. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils; wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
H. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Fill minor defects with filler compound; spot prime defects after repair.
I. Concrete and Unit Masonry: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter at surfaces scheduled to receive paint finish. Remove oil and grease with a solution of trisodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 – 5
weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
J. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust.
Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand/power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint after repairs.
K. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Verify compatibility of specified primer and paint with shop applied primer.
L. Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.
M. Environmental Requirements:
1. Relative Humidity Requirements: Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85%.
2. Temperature:
a. General: Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the manufacturer. b. Exterior Paints: 50 degrees F minimum during and for 48 hours after application; do not apply when temperature is over 85 degrees F, except in protected or shaded areas.
c. Interior Paints: 65 degrees F for minimum of 48 hours before, during and for 48 hours after application.
3. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation of all interior spaces during application and curing of all painting products.
4. Lighting Level: Provide minimum 80 foot candles measured at mid-height of room
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."
B. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.
C. Performance:
1. General: Apply each coat to uniform finish, slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. As a minimum, dry film thickness of each coat shall meet manufacturer’s specification.
2. Metal Surfaces: Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles; use tack cloth just prior to applying next coat. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.
D. Finishing Mechanical and Electrical Equipment: Refer to Division 22 – PLUMBING, Division 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING and Division 26 - ELECTRICAL for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, duct work, piping, and conduit. Paint shop-primed equipment. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 – 6
panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, to match adjacent wall surfaces. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. Paint exposed pre-finished electrical and mechanical equipment occurring in finished areas as directed by Architect. Paint any equipment or components that penetrate metal roofing or siding to match surface penetrated.
Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. Do not paint over labels, tags, equipment identification plates.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. General: Upon completion, remove masking materials, reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing, and thoroughly clean all exposed surfaces per manufacturer's instructions. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste and debris. At completion of work remove surplus materials and debris B. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.
C. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System [MPI INT 3.1M]:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC. 1) Sherwin Williams Latex Primer Sealer, or equal
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams Interior Semi-Gloss
2. Epoxy-Latex Floor Paint System [ MPI EXT 3.3D]:
a. Prime Coat: Floor paint, epoxy- latex, matching topcoat. b. Intermediate Coat: Floor paint, epoxy-latex, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Floor paint, latex, low gloss (maximum MPI Gloss Level 3). 1) Sherwin Williams Armorseal 8100, Greenguard Gold Certified. 2) No known equal; proposed equals are subject to substitution request pro- cess.
B. Steel Substrates:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 – 7
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System [MPI INT 5.1S]:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based.
1) Sherwin Williams HP Acrylic Metal Primer
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams interior Semi-Gloss
C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System
a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based.
1) Sherwin Williams HP Acrylic Metal Primer
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams Interior Semi-Gloss
D. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System [MPI INT 5.4G]:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum.
1) Sherwin Williams Latex Primer Sealer
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams Interior Semi-Gloss
E. Wood Substrates: Exposed framing.
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System [MPI INT 6.2L]:
a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood.
1) Benjamin Moore Sure Seal Latex Primer Sealer.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 – 8
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams Interior Semi-Gloss
d. Provide intumescent paint for fire retardant plywood backer boards at telecom and electrical rooms
F. Gypsum Board Substrates:
1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System [MPI INT 9.2M]:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC. 1) Sherwin Williams Latex Primer Sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 3). 1) Sherwin Williams Interior Eggshell
d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams Interior Semi-Gloss
3.6 Cotton or Canvas and ASJ Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings. a. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5). 1) Sherwin Williams Interior Semi-Gloss
2. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System [MPI INT 10.1D]:
a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior.
1) Sherwin Williams Latex Primer Sealer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5).
1) Sherwin Williams Interior Semi-Gloss #N539.
END OF SECTION 09 91 23
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 – 1
SECTION 10 14 23 – PANEL SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes signage and related work as specified and shown:
1. Engraved Laminated Acrylic Signs.
2. .
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, installation and anchorage instructions for review.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:
1. Low-Emitting Materials: Submit manufacturer’s documentation for each interior adhesive and sealant’s VOC content and VOC emissions testing. Identify certification agency and submit certification agency ID number for each product.
SAMPLES: PROVIDE FULL RANGE OF AVAILABLE COLORS FOR EACH MATERIAL SUBMITTED.
C. Shop Drawings: Show text type, size and spacing, dimensions, mounting heights, layout, material descriptions, finishes, fabrication and installation details for each sign.
D. Closeout Submittals:
1. O & M Manuals: Maintenance and cleaning instructions.
2. Guarantee: Provide completed forms per Article 1.5.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: Design Parking signs, Room Identification Signs (S-RI), Maximum Occupant Load signs (S-RC), Toilet Room Signs (S-TRW, S-TRD), Assistive Listening System Signs (S-ALD), Exit Signs (S-TE), and Miscellaneous Signs, as required by ADA and CBC.
1. General: Comply with Section 11B-703 for design and construction.
2. Raised Characters: Section 11B-703.2.
3. Braille Symbols: California Braille Grade 2, per Section 11B-703.3
4. Mounting Location and Height (where permanent identification is provided or where signage is required for rooms and spaces): Section 11B-703.4.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 – 2
5. Visual Characters: Section 11B-703.5.
6. Pictograms: Section 11B-703.6.
7. Symbols of Accessibility: Section 11B-703.7.2.
8. Doorways leading to Men’s, Boys’, Women’s, and Girls’ Sanitary Facilities: Provide signs that comply with applicable requirements of Sections 11B-703.7.2.6.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with the 2022 California Building Code (CBC).
2. Comply with the 2010 Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines.
3. All signage must be field inspected and approved after installation by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
1.6 GUARANTEE
A. Provide in required form for a period of 1 year from date of acceptance by University.
B. Provide warranty on manufacturer’s form that products are to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 10 years beginning at date of acceptance by University.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FABRICATION
A. General: Unless specified otherwise, sign copy and size shall be as shown.
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
C. Engraved Laminated Acrylic Signs:
1. General: 1/8 inch thick non-glare acrylic core with laminated, non-glare acrylic face in contrasting color. Engrave through face ply to expose contrasting core. Core may be opaque acrylic in selected color, or clear acrylic with selected color painted on back. Ease edges. Comply with CBC Section 11B-703.
2. Letters: Raised, raised 1/32 inch; sans-serif, uppercase; min height, 5/8 inches; max height, 2 inches; width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1; stroke ratio between 1:5 and 1:10; copy as shown.
3. Symbols: Raised 1/32 inch; international symbols as shown.
4. Braille: Dots 1/10 inch on center in each cell with 2/10 inch space between cells, raised minimum of 1/40 inch above background. Contracted grade 2.
D. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer; tamper-proof screws.
E. Adhesives: Subject to sustainable design requirements, as recommended by manufacturer. Where signs are installed with double-sided adhesive tape, tape shall be applied vertically along the sides with silicone construction adhesive applied in between.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PANEL SIGNAGE 10 14 23 – 3
F. Backplate: To match sign material and shape at glass mounting.
G. Concrete: Per Section 03 30 00 – “Cast in Place Concrete.” PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Environmental Requirements: Do not install acrylic signs when temperature is below 70 degrees F.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install in conformance with referenced standards, manufacturer’s written directions, as shown, and as specified.
B. Wall Mounted: Use mechanical fasteners at exterior locations and adhesive at interior locations.
C. Glass Mounted: Use clear adhesive. Install backplate aligned with sign on opposite side of glass.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Keep premises free from accumulation of waste and debris. At completion of installation remove surplus materials and debris.
B. At completion, clean exposed surfaces in a manner that will not damage finish.
END SECTION 10 14 00
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 – 1
SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
1.2 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance data.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.
PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.
2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET Insert drawing designation
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Babcock-Davis.
b. Fire-End & Croker Corporation.
c. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.
d. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. e. Larsens Manufacturing Company.
f. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.
B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated, one-hour fire rated and two-hour fire rated, where indicated on drawings.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 – 2
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from
0.043-inch- thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.
C. Cabinet Material: cold-rolled steel, provide standard range of colors for review.
D. Cabinet Style: Recessed, Trimless
E. Door Material: cold-rolled steel.
F. Door Style: Flush opaque panel, frameless, with no exposed hinges.
G. Door Glazing: Clear Acrylic.
H. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
I. Accessories:
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.
2. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed into face.
3. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.
4. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Silk-screened.
3) Lettering Color: Red.
4) Orientation: Vertical.
J. Materials:
1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304.
2. Cold Rolled Steel
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 10 44 13 – 3
B. Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
D. Identification: Apply decals at locations indicated.
E. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
END OF SECTION 10 44 13
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 – 1
SECTION 12 36 61.16 - SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS
GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Solid surface material countertops.
2. Solid surface material integral backsplashes.
3. Solid surface material end splashes.
4. Solid surface material sinks.
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.
B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.
C. Samples: For each type of material exposed to view.
PRODUCTS
2.1 SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS
A. Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous-filled plastic resin complying with ICPA SS-1.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
B. Solid Surface Material:
1. Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum physical and performance properties specified.
2. Type: Provide Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated.
3. Colors and Patterns: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings.
C. Integral Sink Bowls: Comply with CSA B45.5/IAPMO Z124.
1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following product or comparable product.
a. Manufacturer: Corian
b. Model and sizes: As indicated in Finish Schedule on Drawings. c. ADA compliant: Provide ADA compliant sinks at accessible locations.
2. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 and Grade M-2-Exterior Glue as recommended by Manufacturer.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 – 2
E. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.
2.2 COUNTERTOP SUPPORT BRACKET
A. Concealed countertop steel support brackets
1. Manufacturer:
a. A&M Hardware
b. US Futaba, USF-72531
2. Size: 2.0" version: 9", 12", 18", 24" and 30" support arm lengths
3. Upper extension (EC) and without (C)
4. Mounting hardware.
5. Color: White, powder coat
6. Locations: As indicated on Drawings.
B. Exposed countertop steel support brackets
1. Manufacturer:
a. Doug Mockett, SWS-4
b. Or equal
2. Sizes: 24" and 30" support arm lengths
3. Color: Selected from full range of standard colors.
2.3 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION
A. Fabricate countertops according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions and to the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."
1. Grade: Custom.
B. Configuration:
1. Front: Straight, slightly eased at top and bottom.
2. Backsplash: Integral, straight, slightly eased at corner.
3. End Splash: Matching backsplash.
C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material over 1-inch continuous substrate at open spans with front edge built up with same material with conditions as noted on Drawings.
D. Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material as detailed on Drawings.
E. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field with joints located away from wet areas.
F. Cutouts and Holes:
1. Undercounter Plumbing Fixtures: Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.
G. Finish: Provide surfaces with a uniform polished finish.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SOLID SURFACING COUNTERTOPS 12 36 61.16 – 3
1. Semigloss: gloss range of 20-50
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A. Adhesive: Product recommended by solid surface material manufacturer.
B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets.
Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.
C. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to solid surface material manufacturer's written instructions.
D. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.
E. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall and countertops with adhesive.
F. Install aprons to backing and countertops with adhesive.
G. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.
H. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." END OF SECTION 12 36 61.16
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING 22 01 00 – 1
SECTION 21 01 00 – OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All levels of 22 00 00
B. Preparations.
1. Prior to data collection and compilation, prepare and submit in duplicate an outline of the proposed organization and content.
2. Compilation: Prepare and collect data concurrently with construction progress. Compile per submitted outline.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Form of Submittals
1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner’s personnel.
2. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION”. List:
a. Title of Project.
b. Provide indexed tabs.
c. Identify of separate structure as applicable.
d. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
3. Format:
a. PDF
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. General: Record data and operation and maintenance data are complimentary. Submittal items which may be required under both categories may be included only under one submittal if a statement to that effect is included in the other submittal.
B. Quality Assurance
1. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel.
a. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. b. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
c. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. d. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
C. Content of Manual
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING 22 01 00 – 2
1. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. a. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. b. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
1) Subcontractor or installer.
2) Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
3) Identify area of responsibility of each.
4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement
c. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
2. Product Data:
a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to:
1) Clearly identify specific product or part installed. 2) Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information.
3. Drawings:
a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate. 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2) Control and flow diagrams.
b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation
c. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
4. Supplement product data for the particular installation. a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
5. Factory Authorized Start-Up Report.
a. Provide a factory start-up report for each piece of equipment. Contractor start-up reports, unless contractor is a factory authorized representative will not be allowed.
6. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner’s personnel, give:
1) Proper procedures in event of failure.
2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
D. Manual for Equipment and Systems:
1. Submit one copy of complete manual in final form in PDF format.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING 22 01 00 – 3
2. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate. a. Description of unit and component parts.
1) Function normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures:
1) Start-up, break-in, routing and normal operating instructions. 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. 3) Summer and winter operating instructions.
4) Special operating instructions.
c. Maintenance Procedures:
1) Routing operations.
2) Guide to “trouble-shooting”
3) Disassembly, repair and reassemble.
4) Alignment, adjusting and checking.
d. Servicing and lubrication schedule.
1) List lubricants required.
e. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. g. Original manufacture’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
1) Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
h. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. i. Each contractor’s coordination drawings:
1) As-installed color-coded piping diagrams.
j. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. k. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
l. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications.
3. Content for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate. a. Description of system and component parts.
1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Circuit directories of panel boards.
1) Electric service.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING 22 01 00 – 4
2) Controls.
3) Communications
c. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
d. Operating procedures.
1) Routing and normal operating instructions.
2) Sequences required.
3) Special operating instructions.
e. Maintenance procedures.
1) Routine operations.
2) Guide to “trouble shooting”.
3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
4) Adjustment and checking.
f. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. g. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
h. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. i. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications.
E. Submittal Schedule
1. Submit tow copies of preliminary draft of proposed formats and outlines of contents prior to start of work.
a. Architect will review draft and return one copy with comments.
2. Submit one copy of complete data in final form fifteen days prior to final inspection or acceptance.
a. Copy will be returned after final inspection or acceptance, with comments.
3. Submit specified number of copies of approved data in final form 10 days after final inspection or acceptance.
F. Instruction of Owner’s Personnel.
1. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner’s designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems
2. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. a. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
END OF SECTION 22 01 00
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 1
SECTION 22 05 00 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. This section applies to all Division 22 Plumbing Sections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes all plumbing (equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, specialties) inside the building(s) and outside the building(s) to the point of connection to site plumbing systems.
B. Provide complete plumbing systems including:
1. Service connections to on-site utilities provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications.
2. All piping systems for conduction of cold water, heated water, soil, waste and other fluids as shown or specified for plumbing work.
3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective coverings, piping, and other piping accessories as shown or specified for plumbing work.
4. All plumbing equipment and auxiliary items as specified herein or shown on the drawings.
5. All low voltage wiring for automatic fixtures as required.
C. All chemicals utilized on site as part of coating, sealant, and other products shall not contain any chemical that is listed as part of Proposition 65 known carcinogens that are identified by NTP, IARC, and the USEPA California Proposition 65 chemical repository contractors are not allowed to bring these chemicals on any California Intel site.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 23 - HVAC
B. Division 26 - Electrical Work
1.4 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. For purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic and, although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, the Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify this information at building site.
B. Information presented on Drawings and in the Specifications is based upon latest data available during their preparation. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, levels, etc. will be governed by the structures and the site the contractor shall accept same with this understanding.
C. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes, and suggest proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets, and it shall be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstruction, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Contractor shall be responsible for delivery, storage, protection and placing of all equipment and materials.
B. Equipment stored and installed at the job site shall be protected from dust, water or other damage. Cover all equipment stored exposed to weather.
1.6 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural members shall not be cut or modified in any manner without specific instructions from the structural engineer.
1.7 CODES AND SAFETY ORDERS
A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the State Fire Marshall; the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety; the I.S.O. codes;
1. Latest edition of California Code of Regulations, 2019 Title 24, Part 6;
2. 2022 California Plumbing Code, Title 24, Part 5;
3. 2022 California Mechanical Code, Title 24, Part 4;
4. 2022 California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2;
5. NFPA Codes (versions as referenced in 2022 California Building Code, Title 24 Part 2, chapter 35 and 2022 California Fire Code, title 24, Part 9, chapter 80
6. Other applicable laws and regulations.
B. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes. Drawings and Specifications take precedence when work and materials called for exceed Code requirements.
1.8 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's Instructions:
1. When specifications require that installation comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.
2. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by specifications.
3. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
4. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with the Engineer for further instructions.
5. Do not proceed with work without clear understanding.
1.9 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Obtain all permits and pay all required fees for permits and/or utility services. Inspections required during the course of construction shall be arranged as required. On completion of the work furnish the owners representative with certificates of inspection.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 3
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Assume all responsibility for damage to adjoining properties; and restore property to its original condition, should damage occur as a result of the work of this section. Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize themselves with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the drawings be found during excavations, promptly notify the Architect for instructions as to further action. Failure to do so will make the Contractor liable for any and all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on plans.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
A. General
1. A submittal schedule shall be issued by the contractor within 15 days of award of the contract. This schedule shall allow for timely review and approval as required by the contract documents.
2. These requirements apply only to substitutions, submittals, and shop drawings.
3. The contractor shall review all submittals prior to submission to the Architect. Submittals not reviewed by the contractor will be returned to the contractor and will not be reviewed.
4. Any deviations from specified requirements shall be clearly indicated in submittals.
5. Any errors in or omissions from submittals and any consequences of these are the responsibility of the Contractor.
6. Partial or incomplete submittals may be rejected as not complying with requirements; the Contractor shall be liable for any resultant consequences.
7. Delayed submittals may be rejected as not complying with requirements. Whether accepted or rejected, delayed submittals will not be considered justification for extension of contract time or similar relief.
8. Submittals not required or permitted by the Specifications but made at the option of the Contractor, will be returned without review unless accompanied with written va lid justification.
9. Submittal items improperly included with those of another category (such as a proposed substitution included with shop drawing submittal) are not valid and will be returned without review.
10. Within 35 calendar days after award of the contract, and before fabrications and installation of any material or ordering of any materials, submit for approval one copy in PDF format of complete submittal data on specified and proposed substituted equipment and materials. Submittals shall list all materials proposed identified with drawing symbols and specific data on equipment such as arrangements, performance curves, sizes, capacity, motor locations, and other pertinent data. Check all submittals for conformance to the requirements of the Construction Documents before forwarding to the architect for each item. No consideration will be given to substitutions submitted past 35 -day limit.
The contractor shall be responsible for all quantities and errors and omissions of submittals. Furnish samples when requested.
11. Equipment and materials specified as part of the specifications and drawings are listed by two manufacturer’s names. The first named manufacturer is the basis of design. The second named manufacturer has been determined to be an equivalent in quality or utility.
The second named has not been specifically determined to conform to the first named in size, layout, electrical power, voltage, or impacts to building structure. The contractor is bound by all requirements for substitutes, as described below, for all second named manufacturers and equivalent equipment or products.
12. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below.
13. Acceptance of a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for omi ssions from the submittal or errors in the submittal.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 4
B. Review
1. Submittals will be reviewed for general acceptability, not necessarily including all details.
The engineers review is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is solely responsible for confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating the work with that of other trades and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Corrections of comments made on this submittal during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with the requirements of the contract documents or with its responsibilities listed herein. a. Proposed substitutes will be judged not only for the acceptability of the items themselves, but also how they will be used under the conditions of the particular project.
b. Proposed substitutions will be judged also for compliance with qualifications and conditions stipulated in paragraph 1.13.
2. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below. a. Acceptance of a substitute does not waive the specified requirements. b. Once a substitution is accepted, no revision or re-submittal may be made except for pressing and valid reason and after receipts of approval to do so.
C. Review Directions
1. The notation "No Exceptions Taken" indicates that no further submittal on the particular matter is required and that the Contractor may proceed with normally ensuing action.
The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions, shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data. The submittal has only been reviewed for general conformance with the design concept of the Contract Documents. The contractor is responsible for the dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site; information that pertains solely to the fabrication process or to the means and methods of construction; coordination of the work of all trades; and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. This notation does not modify the contractor's duty to comply with the contract documents.
2. The notation "Make Corrections Noted" indicates that no further submittal on the particular matter is required, but the Contractor shall make all changes or corrections noted (but no others) before proceeding with normally ensuing action. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions or shop drawings (but usually not record data or operation and maintenance data).
3. The notation "Amend and Resubmit" indicates that the submittal is not accepted and must be revised, resubmitted, and reviewed again. In the case of submittal on substitutions and shop drawings so noted, the Contractor shall not proceed with any normally ensuing action until the resubmittal is reviewed. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions, shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data.
4. The notation "Rejected - See Remarks" indicates that the submittal is not accepted and that resubmittal on the same subject matter is not allowed and will not be considered.
The notation will be applied normally only to submittals on substitutions (usually not on shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data).
5. The notation "Returned Without Review" indicates that the submittal or item has not been considered officially because it is either not proper, valid, required, or permitted by the Specifications and has no status or effect.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 5
1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The contractor is responsible for providing all shop drawings so that the design professional has the opportunity to determine if the contractor understands the contract docum ents. It is not the purpose of shop drawings to assure that the contractor is meeting the requirements of the contract documents. Review and approval of a submittal neither extends nor alters any contractual obligation.
B. Accompany all substituted equipment with shop drawings showing revised piping layouts in order to ascertain that substituted equipment does not adversely affect layout or work of others.
Shop Drawings: The following conditions apply to shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings are not and do not become Contract Documents.
2. Processed shop drawing submittals and any instructions or requirements noted thereon are a part of the work, but they may not be used as a means of increasing the scope of the work.
3. If deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after the submittals are processed, the Contract Document requirements shall govern.
1.13 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Whenever any equipment, material, or process is indicated or specified by patent of proprietary name and/or name of Manufacturer, in the Specifications and/or on the Drawings, it is understood that such specification is used to facilitate the description of the material and/or process and deemed to be followed by the words "or equal" unless noted "no substitute".
B. Substitute equipment and materials shall be equal in all respects including quality, arrangement, utility, physical size, capacity, and performance to those specified. Approval of substitute material will not relieve the contractor from complying with the requirement of the Drawings and Specifications. The contractor shall be responsible and at his own expense, for any changes caused by proposed substitutions which affect other parts of his own work or the work of othe r contractors.
C. The submittal of a proposed substitution shall clearly establish the following:
1. The item can be transported into and installed in the intended space and in the manner shown.
2. Required connections (electrical, piping, and other) can be properly made and adjoining work can be properly accomplished.
3. The proposed substitute is similar to and of substance equal to that specified, is suited to the same use as that specified, and will perform the functions required by the design.
4. Motors for proposed substitute equipment will have the same minimum differential between motor brake horsepower and motor nameplate horsepower as the specified equipment.
5. All performance requirements shall be at least equal to the specified product or equipment including noise levels, cooling capacity, heating capacity, air flow quantity, etc.
D. By submitting a proposed substitution, the Contractor agrees to the following:
1. He will assume full responsibility for any and all modifications and necessary alterations arising from the use of the substitute item or material including all cost incurred by all other trades.
2. He will assume full responsibility for any delay in the construction schedule resulting from the use of the substitution.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 6
3. He will prove harmless and indemnify the Owner and the Owner's design consultants from real or alleged damages that may result from the installation, use, or performance of a substitute material or product.
E. The following conditions apply to substitutions:
1. Submittals of substitutions are not and do not become part of the Contract Documents.
2. Contractor shall not order, fabricate, use, or install any substitute product or procedure unless he has received acceptance of the substitute from the Engineer.
3. Should the Contractor install any substitute product in violation of the above he shall remove it and install the specified product at his own expense.
4. The Contractor shall provide a letter stating that all the above items shall apply to all substituted products and equipment.
5. Any submittal for substituted equipment or product that does not clearly show that the substituted item is equal shall be marked rejected and no further submittal shall be allowed on the substituted item. Provide in submittal format documentation that the proposed item is exactly as specified in the contract documents.
1.14 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all work for one year from date of acceptance, against all defects in material, equipment and workmanship including repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment and workmanship. Guarantee shall be on form supplied by the owner's representative.
1.15 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The Contractor shall dedicate one complete full set of Contract Drawings for use in recording as-built conditions.
B. The Contractor shall update the Record Drawings as often as necessary to keep them current, but, no less than weekly.
C. Mark-up Procedure: During the construction period, maintain a complete, current set of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings uploaded and updated within the Bluebeam program for Project Record Documents purposes. Label each document “AS-BUILT RECORD”. Keep all record documents current.
D. The Contractor shall provide a complete set of AS-BUILT RECORD Drawings in AutoCAD (drawing) file format and one complete set in PDF format.
E. A reference by number to Change Order, CCD, RFI, Field Order or other such document is not acceptable as sufficient record information on any document. Do not conceal any Work until required information has been recorded.
1. The Contractor shall mark AS-BUILT Record Drawings to indicate the actual installation where the installation varies appreciably from the installation shown originally. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or record later.
a. Revisions or any modification to details shown on the Contract Drawings b. Depths of various plumbing related to the main floor level. c. Horizontal or vertical location of underground utilities. d. Location of internal utilities concealed in construction. e. Points of connection for underground work.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 7
f. Revisions to pipe routing locations.
g. Incorporate changes made by Change order, CCD, ASI, RFI etc. h. Any new details not shown on the Contract Drawings.
2. The Contractor shall mark completely and accurately AS-BUILT Record Drawing prints of Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is the most capable of showing actual physical conditions. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings location.
3. The Contractor shall mark AS-BUILT Record Drawings within BLUEBEAM with red markings. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of Work at the same location.
4. The Contractor shall note Contractor Change Directives numbers; Bid Alternate numbers; if any, Change Order numbers, and similar identification.
F. Contractor shall prepare Record Drawings: Immediately prior to inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion of the Work, review completed marked-up AS-BUILT Record Drawings with District, Project Inspector to ensure accuracy of information. Once accuracy of information is confirmed, prepare and submit a full electronic set, professionally drafted in AutoCAD format, of as-built Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on print sets. Delete, redraw, and/or add details and notations where applicable. Identify and date each Drawing; include the printed designation “AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWING” and the date prepared in a prominent location on each Drawing.
2. Distribution: Whether or not changes and additional information were recorded, organize the original marked-up set of drawings that were maintained during the construction period within BLUEBEAM into manageable sets. The sets should be label ed with all appropriate identification, including titles, dates and other information on cover sheets and submit to Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Make all drawings to an appropriate scale, large enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and the method of its connection into the work.
2. Make each drawing sheet in a reproducible form such a tracing, sepia, or Mylar transparency.
B. Grouping: Combine submittals in logical groupings; for example, submit Shop Drawings grouped by Sections of the Specifications, arranged in the specified sequence.
C. Shop Drawings: Four blue or black line prints of each for the Engineer.
D. Content:
1. Shop drawings may be:
a. Drawings or diagrams prepared by the Contractor, a supplier, a manufacturer, or other.
b. Typewritten data or descriptions.
c. Manufacturer’s printed brochures, descriptions, charts, instructions, or data sheets.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 8
E. Timing: Submit all shop drawings prior to installation of any items included in submittal.
2.2 CORROSION PROOFING
A. Corrosion Proofing / U.V. Protection: Products which will be installed outdoors, exposed to the weather, exposed to moisture, or other potentially damaging conditions shall be constructed to resist the effects of such exposure.
B. Exterior casings shall have lapped or gasketed joints effectively sealed to prevent intrusion of moisture or other injurious substances.
C. Casings, pipes, or product items shall be constructed of materials which are fully resistant to harmful substances they may normally contact, or (if ferrous) shall be galvanized after fabrication, or shall be fully protected from such substances by paint or other coating in appropriate thickness or number of coats.
D. All bolts, nuts, screws, and washers shall be Galvanized unless specified to be Stainless Steel.
E. Any exposed plastic pipe must have a U.V. inhibitor or U.V. P.
F. PROJECT SPECIFIC NOTE: Div 22 Contractor shall review exposed PVC vent through roof and apply a UV protection on any exposed vents through roof that are not protected.
2.3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. All material and equipment shall be new, of the type, capacity and quality specified and free from defects. All materials and equipment shall be of the same brand or manufacturer throughout for each class of material or equipment wherever possible.
2.4 ACCESS DOORS
A. Unless specified otherwise by the Architect, provide access doors of the following type:
1. Concealed hinges, prime coated with rust-inhibitive paint, style of door to suit wall, ceiling, floor or roof construction and fire rating.
a. Milcor Type M
b. Milcor Type UFR, fire resistive type Underwriters Laboratory Class B, 1-1/2 hour rating meets UBC, IBCO and BOCA codes for two hour rated walls self latching with key lock, Elmdor/Stonman Type FR or equal.
2. Minimum size; 14" by 14".
3. Wall and ceiling access doors: Furnish as required for access to valves etc.; coordinate size and location to obtain access.
4. See architectural drawings for further requirements.
2.5 IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment: Black Phenolic Plates engraved with 1/2” high white letters. The equipment shall be identified by the equipment schedule tag numbers shown on the plans (i.e. GWH-1).
Coordinate identification numbers with electrical contractor to ensure that the disconnect switches and other electrical/mechanical equipment has consistent identification n umbers.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 9
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Furnish and install miscellaneous equipment and materials required for the systems described whether or not specifically shown or specified.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 ACCESSIBILITY
A. Do not install any equipment, valve, control, motor, filter, or any other device requiring maintenance or service in an inaccessible location or position. Install access doors as specified herein to render all such equipment serviceable whether specifically shown on the plans or not.
Maintain code clearance to all equipment. Coordinate location of doors with lights, etc., and locate symmetrically with same.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Observations: Check all project drawings and specifications; report any discrepancies before proceeding with the work and in time to avoid unnecessary rework.
B. Investigation: Examine the areas, conditions, and status of other work contiguous or connecting to the work to be performed; ensure that the time of installation is coordinated with other work.
C. Interruptions of Service: Portions of this work may involve connection to existing work, facilities, or utilities ties and may require interrupting shutdowns of same. Carefully plan, coordinate and execute such work so that any interruptions will be kept to a minimum in time and occu rrence.
Submit request for shutdowns and make shutdowns only after receiving written approval from the Owner.
D. Other: Correct any unsatisfactory conditions that may impede proper execution of the work.
Ensure that all arrangements, personnel, materials, and tools are appropriate and adequate before proceeding.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Material and equipment incorporated in the work shall be used or applied only for the purpose intended or specified.
2. Install piping and all equipment that requires access with minimum vertical and horizontal clearances required by OSHA for service.
3. All pipes and all other equipment shall have 2 inches minimum clearance.
4. Do not proceed with work without clear understanding.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions:
1. When specifications require that installation comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.
2. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by specifications.
3. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 10
4. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with the Engineer for further instructions.
5. Do not proceed with work without clear understanding.
3.4 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING
A. Where job conditions do not permit the installation of piping, etc. in the location shown, it shall be brought to the engineer's attention immediately before fabrication of piping, etc. and the relocation required shall be determined in a joint conference.
B. The contractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items installed without first obtaining the architect’s or engineer’s approval. Remove and relocate such items at the contractors expense as so directed by the architect or engineer.
C. Where piping is left exposed within a room, run in vertical or horizontal planes. Maintain uniform spacing between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor or ceiling surfaces.
D. Horizontal runs of plumbing suspended from ceilings shall provide for maximum clearance.
E. Make minor changes in locations of equipment and piping, etc. from locations shown including minor offsets when directed by the engineer, at no additional cost to the owner.
3.5 CARE AND CLEANING
A. Clean and adjust all equipment at completion of installation to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the engineer. Remove broken, damaged or defective parts; repair or replace as directed by engineer. Remove surface material and debris resulting from this work when directed.
3.6 EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all equipment with permanently attached plates.
3.7 FLASHINGS
A. Furnish and install a waterproof flashing for each pipe or other penetration through roof or wall.
Where details are not specifically delineated, submit details for review.
3.8 PAINTING
A. Painting is included under the Painting and Finishing Section. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to properly protect all equipment and controls during painting operations and the Contractor shall repair and/or replace any item damaged due to painting that was not properl y protected.
3.9 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors to all concealed equipment, valves, controls, etc. Locate doors where shown or to be coordinated and symmetrically located with lights, diffusers, etc. Access doors furnished by the contractor shall be installed by the general contractor.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 11
3.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. General: Record data and operation and maintenance data are complementary. Submittal items which may be required under both categories may be included only under one submittal if a statement to that effect is included in the other submittal.
B. Quality Assurance
1. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel
a. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. b. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
c. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. d. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings.
C. Form of Submittals
1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. a. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION". List:
b. Title of Project
c. Provide indexed tabs.
d. Identity of separate structure as applicable.
e. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
2. Format
a. Electronic PDF
3. Drawings
a. Provide supporting drawings as needed.
D. Content of Manual
1. Table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. c. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
1) Subcontractor or installer.
2) Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
3) Identify area of responsibility of each.
4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
5) Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
2. Product Data
a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to:
1) Clearly identify specific product or part installed.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 12
2) Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information.
3. Drawings
a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate. 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2) Control and flow diagrams.
b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation.
c. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
4. Factory Authorized Start-Up Report.
a. Provide a factory start-up report for each piece of equipment. Contractor start-up reports, unless contractor is a factory authorized representative will not be allowed.
5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give:
1) Proper procedures in event of failure.
2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
E. Manual for Equipment and Systems
1. Submit electronic PDF in final form.
a. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate. 1) Description of unit and component parts.
2) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
4) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 5) Operating procedures
6) Start-up, break-in, routing and normal operating instructions. 7) Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. 8) Summer and winter operating instructions.
9) Special operating instructions.
10) Maintenance Procedures
11) Routing operations
12) Guide to "trouble-shooting".
13) Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
14) Alignment, adjusting and checking
15) Servicing and lubrication schedule.
16) List of lubricants required.
17) Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 18) Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. 19) Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
20) Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
21) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
22) As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 13
23) Each contractor's coordination drawings.
24) As-installed color coded piping diagrams.
25) Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. 26) List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 27) Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. 28) Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate. 29) Description of system and component parts.
30) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 31) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
32) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. 33) Circuit directories of panel boards.
34) Electrical service.
35) Controls.
36) Communications
37) As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
38) Operating procedures:
39) Routing and normal operating instructions.
40) Sequences required
41) Special operating instructions
42) Maintenance procedures
43) Routine operations
44) Guide to "trouble-shooting".
45) Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
46) Adjustment and checking.
47) Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 48) List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. 49) Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. 50) Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications.
F. Instruction of Owner's Personnel
1. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.
2. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. a. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
3.11 RECORD DATA
A. Compilation
1. Record and collect information concurrently with construction progress and date all entries; make drawing entries within 24 hours after occurrence of change or installation requiring recording. Any concealed work covered before recording data shall be uncovered as directed or as necessary to obtain data.
a. Record information on drawing prints using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil); describe clearly by note or graphic line as appropriate.
2. Locate any concealed work adequately to allow future access with reasonable ease and accuracy.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 – 14
a. Identify the plan location of all stub outs, pipe lines, etc., which are buried or concealed in the structure, whether installed where shown on the contract drawings or in a different location; show actual field dimensions from column lines, wall lines, or other permanent reference lines or points.
b. In many cases on the contract drawings, the arrangement of conduits, pipes and similar items is shown schematically rather than as a precise scaled layout. Identify the actual location of these with horizontal and vertical dimensions. If such lines are exposed or readily accessible, omit dimensional identification. c. When any work is installed of size, dimension, slope, or location different from that shown on the contract drawings, note the deviation on the Project Record set. If the variations are substantial or cannot be shown clearly on the record drawings, make a new drawing and attach to the Record set.
3. On other documents
a. Where changes occur in specifications, clearly indicate same in ink, colored pencil, or rubber stamp.
b. Where installed equipment differs from that specified (e.g., by accepted substitution or change order) note in the specifications and include complete data on same.
3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Preparations: Prior to data collection and compilation, prepare and submit in duplicate an outline of the proposed organization and content.
B. Compilation: Prepare and collect data concurrently with construction progress. Compile per submitted outline.
C. See Section 22 01 00 Operation and Maintenance of Plumbing.
END OF SECTION 22 05 00
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING 22 05 23 – 1
SECTION 22 05 23 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All Division 22 Mechanical Sections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. See Section 22 05 00
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. N/A
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Shut-off service, domestic water
1. Ball Valves:
a. Sizes 2” and smaller: NIBCO T/S/PC-585-66-LF or T/S/PC-585HP-66-LF, 600- 1000 psi rated, threaded or sweat ends, full port, teflon seat, quarter turn handle with stops, two-piece, lead free, bronze body and stainless steel ball.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Valves shall be full size of line in which installed. All valves shall be properly packed and lubricated. Unions shall be placed adjacent to each threaded or soldered valve or equipment connection 2" and smaller.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
C. All shutoff valves in water lines shall be or ball valves, unless otherwise shown.
END OF SECTION 22 05 23
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
22 05 29 – 1
SECTION 22 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All Division 23 Mechanical Sections.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install all plumbing work shown on the drawings, specified herein, and as required for a complete and functional installation.
B. This section includes materials and methods applicable to the work described in all Division 2 2 Plumbing Sections. Specific work requirements of individual Sections take precedence if in conflict with requirements of this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit proposed alternative methods of attachment for review and approval by the Engineer, prior to deviating from the requirements given below.
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 26 Electrical Work
B. Division 23 HVAC
1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Information presented on Drawings and in the Specifications is based upon latest data available during their preparation. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistance and g uidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, levels, etc. will be governed by the structures and the site the contractor shall accept same with this understanding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. B-Line, Superstrut, Tolco, Grinnell, or equal. Numbers are B-line.
B. Finish: Electro-Chromate or hot dipped galvanized.
C. Trapeze Suspension, for three or more pipes B-Line 1-5/8" width channel or a size suitable for load in accordance with manufacturer's published load ratings. No deflection to exceed 1 /180 of a span.
D. Trapeze Supporting Rods: Diameter sufficient to support the load with a safety factor of 5.
Anchor rods securely to building structure. See part three for minimum sizes.
E. Pipe Straps: copper coated for copper.
F. Size: For insulated pipe - pipe hangers sized to allow pipe insulation to pass continuously through the hanger.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
22 05 29 – 2
G. Insulated Pipe Shields: Utilize isolated pipe supports at all insulated pipe hanger locations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Support all piping so that it is firmly held in place by approved iron hangers and supports and special hangers as required or as scheduled on the drawings.
1. Rigidly fasten hose faucets, and similar items at ends of pipe branches to the building construction near point of connection.
B. Hanger Installation: On all insulated pipes, install the hangers on the outside of the pipe covering and not in contact with the pipe. Burning, welding, cutting, or drilling on any structural member may only be done if approved by the structural engineer. No valve or piece of equipment shall be used to support the weight of any pipe. Provide a hanger close to the point of change of direction of pipe run in either horizontal or vertical plane. Place supports and hangers for cast iron soil pipe as close as possible to joints; when hangers or supports do not come within one foot of a branch line fitting, install an additional hanger or support at the fitting.
Protect insulation, when pipe is insulated, at each hanger with 180 degree, 18 gauge, 12 inch long G.I. Saddles.
C. Hanger rods with C-clamp type structural attachment shall be equipped with retaining straps.
D. Metallic Pipe Hanger Spacing and Rod Size Schedule: Refer to contract drawings E. Anchor pipe subject to expansion or contraction in a manner permitting strains to be evenly distributed.
F. All hangers and fasteners are subject to the approval of the Structural Engineer.
G. Provide beam clamp retaining straps for all pipe supports attached to structural beams.
END OF SECTION 22 05 29
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SEE SECTION 23 05 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment: Black Phenolic Plates engraved with 1/2" high white letters. The equipment shall be identified by the mechanical equipment schedule tag numbers shown on the plans (ie.
EHW-3).
2.02 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Maximum spacing for identification shall be 10 feet.
B. Identification shall be provided per the following
1. At both sides of floor or wall penetrations
2. Adjacent to all valves and flanges
3. Adjacent to all changes in direction
4. To be visible from the point of normal approach
C. Indicate flow direction and type of fluid.
D. Provide plastic labels for mechanical engraving with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
1. Material: rigid plastic laminated impact acrylic, 2-layer, exterior grade, UV stable.
2. Thickness: 3/16 inch minimum.
3. Maximum label size: Length and width vary for required label content but, no less than 2 inches wide by 1 inch high.
4. Background color:
5. Normal power: Black, matte finish.
6. Lettering: White, machine engraved, Futura font, 3/8 inch high, all caps.
7. Maximum temperature: Able to withstand up to 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
8. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws, except contact type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.
a. Mounting screw type to be number 8 – 18 by ½ drilling or tapping style, ¼ inch hex washer head, stainless steel, or similar, appropriate for material in which sign is affixed to. A bead of silicone sealer shall be applied on back of sign and at screw locations prior to affixing sign to equipment.
b. For signs larger than 3 inches by 3 inches, use a minimum of 4 mounting screws.
2.03 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with the letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications but, not less than ¾ inch high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
B. Stencil paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade.
C. Identification paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 – 2
2.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. General requirements for Manufactured Pipe labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. Brady/Seton, Stranco, Rowmark or equal.
C. Small pipes: For external diameters less than 6 inches, provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around the pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.
3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).
4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4 inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 inches.
5. Pipe label contents: Include identification of piping service using piping system nomenclature as specified, schedules or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application. Include pipe size and an arrow indicating direction of flow.
6. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
7. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
D. Locate pipe markers as follows:
1. Within one foot of each valve, fitting, thermometer or gauge.
2. At each branch or riser take off.
3. At each passage through walls or ceiling construction.
4. At each passage to underground.
5. On all horizontal pipe runs every 20 feet, at least twice in each room.
6. Identify piping contents, flow direction, supply and return.
7. At wall and ceiling access panels.
8. Practible variations or changes in locations and spacing may be made with specific approval of the University’s Representive to meet specific conditions.
E. Color code shall be as follows:
1. Domestic Cold Water – Green Background with White Lettering
2. Domestic Hot Water - Green Background with White Lettering
3. Domestic Hot Water Return - Yellow Background with Black Lettering
4. Lab Air – yellow background with white text
5. Lab Vacuum – White background with black text (could have checkerboard pattern)
6. Medical Air – Yellow background with black text
7. Oxygen – Green background with white text or white background with green text
F. Pipe Letter height shall be as follows:
Outside Pipe Diameter
Including Insulation
Minimum Length of Label Minimum Height of Letters
.75” – 1.25” 8” .5”
1.5” – 2” 8” .75”
2.5” – 6” 12” 1.25”
PART 3 - EXECUTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 22 05 53 – 3
3.01 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all equipment with permanently attached plates.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING INSULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 22 07 00 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. All Division 22 sections.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This Section describes insulation materials, methods, and applications for Plumbing Work, Special or specific details, applications, features, or methods may be described in work descriptions Sections or on the drawings.
1.03 RELATED DIVISIONS
A. 21 00 00: Fire Sprinklers
B. 22 00 00: Plumbing
C. 23 00 00: HVAC
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Thermal insulation materials shall meet the property requirements of one or more of the following specifications as applicable to the specific product or end use:
1. American Society for Testing of Materials Specifications:
a. ASTM C 547, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation" b. ASTM C 585, "Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)" c. ASTM C 1136, "Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation"
1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Insulation materials furnished should meet the minimum thickness requirements of National Voluntary Consensus Standard 90.1 (Latest edition), "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings," of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
B. Insulation materials furnished and installed hereunder shall meet the fire hazard requirements of applicable building codes when tested in composite form per one of the following nominally equivalent test methods:
1. American Society for Testing of Materials ASTM E 84
2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. UL 723, CAN/ULC-S102-M88
3. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 255
C. Molded pipe insulation shall be manufactured to meet ASTM C 585 for sizes required in the particular system.
D. Molded fibrous glass pipe insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 547.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers: only a licensed firm employing installers specifically skilled and experienced in applying insulation to piping shall do Insulation work.
B. Insulation materials and accessories furnished and installed hereunder shall, where required, be accompanied by manufacturers' current submittal or data sheets showing compliance with applicable specifications listed in above.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING INSULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 22 07 00 – 2
C. Insulation materials, including all weather and vapor barrier materials, closures, hangers, supports, fitting covers, and other accessories, shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with project drawings, plans, and specifications.
D. Insulation materials and accessories shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled and experienced workers who are regularly engaged in commercial insulation work.
E. Codes and Standards:
1. California Code of Regulations - Title 24.
2. National Fire Protection Association - 90A
3. Insulation applied to the exterior or interior surface of ducts, and the exterior surface of piping, shall be UL labeled with maximum flame-spread rating of 25 and maximum smoke- developed rating of 50 according to ASTME 84, when tested as a composite installation including insulation, facing materials, and adhesives as normally applied.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. All of the insulation materials and accessories covered by this specification shall be delivered to the job site and stored in a safe, dry place with appropriate labels and/or other product identification.
B. The contractor shall use whatever means are necessary to protect the insulation materials and accessories before, during, and after installation. No insulation materi al shall be installed that has become damaged in any way.
C. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. An exception may be allowed in cases where the contractor is able to demonstrate that wet insulation when fully dried out (either before installation or afterward following exposure to system operating temperatures) will provide installed performance that is equ ivalent in all respects to new, completely dry insulation. In such cases, consult the insulation manufacturer for technical assistance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION – SEE 22 07 19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION/INSTALLATION
A. Use the types and thickness of insulation specified in work description Sections.
B. Apply insulations in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with instructions specified herein or noted on the drawings.
C. Install insulations only after the systems, items, and equipment have been installed and tested, inspected, and accepted. Exceptions: Slip-on piping insulation and equipment insulations installed at the factory.
D. Fit insulation snugly to the item being insulated; butt all joints tightly with no voids, spaces, or thin spots.
E. Seal all joints completely; where sealing tape is used, center the tape over the joint.
F. Except where specified or necessary, do not use staples or fasteners which penetrate vapor barrier jackets or covers on cold systems or equipment; where such penetrating fasteners are used, seal each penetration completely to maintain the vapor barrier integrity. All penetrations of the ASJ and exposed ends of insulation shall be sealed with vapor barrier mastic. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section joint and at each fitting to provide isolation of water incursion.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING INSULATION GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 22 07 00 – 3
G. Use adhesives, mastics, cements, sealants, and finishes undiluted unless specifically directed otherwise; apply per manufacturer's directions.
H. Install all indoor exposed insulation with extra care and finish neatly.
I. Follow specified methods of installation unless alternative methods are submitted and approved.
3.02 FINISHING
A. Finishes and Protection:
1. Insure that the exterior finish of all insulation is applied and complete as specified.
2. Make ready for painting, or painted to match existing including color where specified for paint.
3. Install all metal jackets or protective sheathing where specified.
B. Repair, Touchup: Properly repair and touchup all dents, rips, tears, or other damage inflicted on jackets or exterior surfaces of insulation. Breaks or punctures in the vapor barrier of external insulation will not be accepted and must be repaired prior to project acceptance.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. A continuous intact vapor barrier is critical for all pipes conveying fluids at temperatures less than 75° F.
B. All insulation material shall have a mold, humidity, and erosion resistant face that has met the requirements of 2019 CMC Standard No. 6-1.
C. Insulation applied to the exterior surface of pipes located in buildings shall have a flame spread of no more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than 50.
D. All requirements of Section 22 07 00 apply to this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 IP-1 RIGID MOLDED SECTIONAL/INDOOR CONCEALED JACKET A. Regular shape (straight run).
1. Molded sectional, factory fabricated of heavy density resin bonded fibrous glass, with integral factory applied all service jack of Kraft paper/aluminum foil/glass fiber reinforcement.
2. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity k factor of 0.23 at 75° F mean temperature and be suitable for direct application and service on piping having operating surface temperatures of -60° to 450°F.
3. Jacket shall:
a. Extend 1-1/2” (minimum) along one edge of longitudinal joint to form a sealing lap, which shall be faced inside with a paper protected pressure sensitive adhesive. b. Have a permanence rating of 0.02 perm/in. and a Beach puncture resistance of 50 units;
c. Have an exterior suitable for painting with latex or water base paint.
4. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, tape seal and adhesive used to adhere jacket to the insulation). Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding Flame Spread of 25 and a Smoke Developed of 50. PVC fitting covers and accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same component ratings.
5. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently flame and smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.
6. Fiberglass Schuler-Manville Micro-Lok, or equal.
B. Irregular shape (fittings, flanges, valves, etc.)
1. Fibrous glass of same density, thickness, and other properties or characteristics as the adjacent regular shape insulation either pre-molded or field forged to fit the item being insulated. The pre-molded insulation shall be provided with weather protection cover.
2.02 IP-2 RIGID MOLDED SECTIONAL/OUTDOOR JACKET
A. Regular shape (straight run).
1. Molded sectional, factory fabricated of heavy density resin bonded fibrous glass, with integral factory applied all service jacket of Kraft paper/aluminum foil/glass fiber reinforcement.
2. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity k factor of 0.23 at 75° F mean temperature and be suitable for direct application and service on piping having operating surface temperatures of -60° to 450°F.
3. Jacket:
4. Straight runs: .016” thick smooth sheet aluminum finish.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 – 2
5. Irregular shapes:
a. Amerisafe, factory molded aluminum covers, or
b. Mitered aluminum sheet matching straight run jacketing, or c. Weather coating.
d. Alternative jacketing: Schuler-Manville Type ML, metal jacketing system.
6. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, tape seal and adhesive used to adhere jacket to the insulation). Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding Flame Spread of 25 and a Smoke Developed of 50. PVC fitting covers and accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same component ratings.
7. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently flame and smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.
8. Fiberglass Schuler-Manville Micro-Lok, or equal.
B. Irregular shape (fittings, flanges, valves, etc.)
1. Fibrous glass of same density, thickness, and other properties or characteristics as the adjacent regular shape insulation, either pre-molded or field forged to fit the item being insulated. The pre-molded insulation shall be provided with weather protection cover.
2.03 IP-3 ELASTOMERIC FOAM
A. Insulation shall be Elastomeric Foam Insulation. Insulation should have a maximum service temperature of 210° F, a minimum service temperature of -40°F, and a “K” factor of 028 at 75°F.
The flame spread of the insulation shall be 25 or less, and smoke density shall be 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Provide U.V. protective coating for all outdoor applications. Foster 30-64, Armacell WB Coating or K-Flex 374.
C. K-Flex R-180-FS/R-1800-FS, Armacell Armaflex or equal.
2.04 IP-4 CLOSED CELL POLYOLEFIN
A. Closed cell flexible plastic foam insulation should have a “k” factor of 0.27 or less at 75°F and water vapor permeability of .2 perm-inch or less. The manufacturer shall warrant the insulation to be able to be directly buried underground without any protective jacket.
B. Closed Cell Polyolefin in tubular form shall comply with ASTM C-534, UL 94HBF, UBC 42-1 Class I, ASTM E-84 (25/50), NFPA 255 (25/50), UL 723(25/50), FMCSS-302, CAN-ULC- S102.2-M88 (25/50) Flammability Classification, MEA#267-92-M, New York.
C. Provide U.V. protective coating for all outdoor applications.
D. IMCOA Imcolock or equal.
2.05 IP-5 RIGID MOLDED SECTIONAL/INDOOR EXPOSED JACKET
A. Regular shape (straight run)
1. Molded sectional, factory fabricated of heavy density resin bonded fibrous glass, with integral factory applied all service jacket of Kraft paper/aluminum foil/glass fiber reinforcement.
2. Insulation shall have a thermal conductivity k factor of 0.23 at 75°F mean temperature and be suitable for direct application and service on piping having operating surface temperatures of -60° to 450°F.
3. Jacket:
a. Straight runs: PVC fitting covers with vapor barrier. b. Irregular shapes:
c. Zeston, Snap-Form, factory molded PVC covers, or
d. Mitered aluminum sheet matching straight run jacketing, or
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 – 3
e. Alternative jacketing: Schuler-Manville Type ML, metal jacketing system.
4. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, tape seal and adhesive used to adhere jacket to the insulation). Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings as tested under procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding Flame Spread of 25 and a Smoke Developed of 50. PVC fitting covers and accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same component ratings.
5. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently flame and smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.
6. Fiberglass Schuler-Manville Mico-Lok, or equal.
B. Irregular shape (fittings, flanges, valves, etc.)
1. Fibrous glass of same density, thickness, and other properties or characteristics as the adjacent regular shape insulation, either pre-molded or field forged to fit the item being insulated. The pre-molded insulation shall be provided with PVC protection cover.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS
Note: Where multiple systems are listed, contractor has the option to choose.
A. Condensate (CD) water piping above grade/indoors
1. Use System IP-4. (Closed Cell Polyolefin).
a. ¾" thickness for all sizes
2. Use System IP-1. (Rigid Molded Sectional/Indoor Jacket) with vapor barrier. a. ¾" thickness for all sizes
B. Domestic cold water (CW) piping above grade/indoors (where exposed in room – to protect from condensation):
1. Use System IP-4. (Closed Cell Polyolefin).
a. ½" thickness for all sizes
2. Use System IP-1. (Rigid Molded Sectional/Indoor Jacket) with vapor barrier. a. ½" thickness for all sizes smaller than 1”. Use 1” thickness for 1” thru 4” b. ½" thickness for all sizes smaller than 1”. Use 1” thickness for 1” thru 4” C. Domestic hot water (HW) above grade/indoors
1. Use System IP-1. (Rigid Molded Sectional/Indoor Jacket) with vapor barrier. a. For temperatures 105 to 140° F, 1” thickness for pipes smaller than 1" diameter (R - value=7.7), 1-1/2" thickness for 1" & 1-1/4” diameter pipe (R-value=12.5).
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Unless specifically excluded herein or on the drawings, insulate all parts of hot piping systems, and condensate drains including fittings, flanges, valves, and pipe-mounted devices, except do not cover nameplates on devices.
B. Install insulation in removable sections over unions, flanges, and line components or devices requiring periodic maintenance.
C. Install insulation butted tightly to transitions such as insulated pipe shields, insulated pipe sleeves, equipment connections, etc.
D. Install insulation on piping systems so that condensation will not occur. Insulate pipe supports where hanger is directly in contact with pipe up to the point of connection to the building structure. All piping shall be supported in such a manner that neither the insulation nor the vapor/weather barrier is compromised by the hanger or the effects of the hanger. In all cases, hanger spacing shall be such that the circumferential joint may be made outside the hanger. On
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 – 4
cold systems, vapor barrier shall be continuous, including material covered by the hanger saddle.
E. Treat equipment face piping as follows:
1. Where piping is subject to condensation (domestic water systems &, condensate drains) and where installed above grade outdoors (either hot or cold systems) insulate piping completely to the point of equipment connection.
2. Where not subject to condensation (hot water systems) terminate insulation at the outlet side of the equipment shut-off valve, leaving the face piping un-insulated, 24” max, unless noted otherwise, except where exposed to outdoors.
F. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over all piping surfaces.
G. Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on all pipe insulation, protecting it against puncture, tears or other damage. All staples used on cold pipe insulation shall be coated with Foster 30-65 or Childers CP-34 vapor barrier coating to maintain vapor barrier integrity.
H. Rigid Molded Sectional/Jacketed:
1. Comply with applicable general instructions above.
2. Apply to all hot water and piping (except where specified or noted otherwise) installed above grade indoors and outdoors, concealed or exposed.
3. Seal all transverse joints (except at PVC fitting jackets) with circumferentially applied 3" (minimum) width tape of same material as the jacket, faced with the same adhesive as the longitudinal lap, or seal with Hardcast 4" wide Type DT490-C mineral impregnated woven fiber tape (synthetic fiber indoors, cotton fiber outdoors) using Hardcast FTA -20 activator/adhesive applied by brush or roller. Seal transverse joints at PVC fittings jackets with color matching PVC tape and vapor barrier mastic adhesive.
4. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with pre-formed fiberglass fittings, fabricated sections of fiberglass pipe insulation, blanket insulation, or insulating cement. Thickness shall be equal to adjacent pipe insulation. Finish shall be with pre-formed PVC fitting covers or as otherwise specified on contract drawings.
5. Flanges, couplings and valve bonnets shall be covered with an oversized pipe insulation section sized to provide the same insulation thickness as on the main pipe section. An oversized insulation section shall be used to form a collar between the two insulation sections with low-density blanket insulation being used to fill gaps. Jacketing shall match that used on straight pipe sections. Rough-cut ends shall be coated with suitable weather or vapor resistant mastic as dictated by the system location and service.
6. On hot systems where fittings are to be left exposed, insulation ends should be beveled away from bolts for easy access.
7. On cold systems, particular care must be given to vapor sealing the fitting cover or finish to the pipe insulation vapor barrier. All valve stems shall be sealed with caulking to allow free movement of the stem but provide a seal against moisture incursion.
8. Fit insulation terminations with Zeston, Snap Form, end cap jackets, or seal with Hardcast tape as specified above for joints.
9. On all piping (except equipment face piping) installed outdoors, install outdoor jacketing.
Install aluminum sheet jacket with all joints turned down at 45º below horizontal; secure in place with non-corroding bands and/or blind rivets (do not puncture vapor barrier insulation jacket). On equipment face piping (including equipment shut-off valve) coat the insulation with ¼" thick Foster 46-50 or Childers CP-10/11 (weatherproofing) mastic reinforced with glass fabric and finished with two (2) coats of aluminum paint.
10. Penetrations
a. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors, and similar piping penetrations, except where otherwise specified.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 19 – 5
I. Closed Cell Polyolefin:
1. Install pre slit, pre-glued closed cell polyolefin foam pipe insulation as per manufacturer's recommendations. Seal all joints and seams with Fuse-Seal Gun or with Armstrong 520 adhesive or equal in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Fabricate fitting covers from polyolefin foam insulation using same procedure.
2. Verify that work of this section may be installed in strict accordance with the original design, all pertinent codes and regulations, and all pertinent portions of the referenced standards.
3. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Architect.
4. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.
J. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
K. Install faced insulation with facing to occupied room side. Install non-rated facing in contact with unexposed surface of finish materials.
L. Do not install insulation over recessed light fixtures.
M. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Fit insulation into crevices, spaces at outlet boxes and similar penetrations.
N. Maintain continuous foil faced vapor barrier. Provide fire resistive tape at all edges or penetrations of foil faced insulation, including batt ends.
O. Where wall insulation cavity exceeds 8 feet high, provide blocking or other approved support at 8 feet on center.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 22 11 00, Facility Water Distribution applies to this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes all plumbing (equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, specialties) inside the building(s) and outside the building(s) to the point of connection to site plumbing systems.
B. Provide complete plumbing systems including:
1. Service connections to existing on-site utilities, and stubs for future connection to equipment provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications.
2. All piping systems for conduction of cold water, heated water, soil, waste, fuel gas, and other fluids or gases as shown or specified for plumbing work.
3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective coverings, piping, and other piping accessories as shown or specified for plumbing work.
4. All plumbing equipment and auxiliary items as specified herein or shown on the drawings.
5. No Pro-Press or similar copper pipe joining method will be accepted.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 05 00 - Plumbing
B. Section 22 07 00 - Insulation
C. Section 21 00 00 - Fire Protection
D. Section 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, latest edition.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. Pipes and Tubes (See 2.03 for application of pipe to be used)
1. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types K, L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
2. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
B. Fittings
1. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
2. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, ASTM B584.
3. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Threaded -Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.15, ASTM B584.
4. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Classes 150 and 300.
5. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and- socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
C. Joining Materials
1. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32, alloys to suit system requirements.
2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, alloys to suit system requirements.
1.06 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 – 2
A. Structural members shall not be cut or modified in any manner without specific instructions from the structural engineer. Where possible, offset vents and pipes rising in walls, concealed above ceilings, below plates and rise through roof. Where this is not possible, install vents and pipes through plates as detailed on structural drawings.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a general statement of materials and methods along with manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for all equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, and plumbing specialties to be installed.
B. Record Drawings: Per specification section 22 05 00 requirements.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Per specification section 22 01 00 requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Adapters: Wrought copper male adapters shall be used wherever it is necessary to connect copper tubing to a valve or "tee" having threaded connections.
2.02 PIPE, FITTING, AND JOINING MATERIALS
A. Copper Water Pipe (See 2.03 for application of pipe to be used)
1. Pipe: Above grade, Type M, L, or K hard drawn copper tubing per ASTM B-88, plain ends.
2. Fittings: Solder type, wrought copper per ANSI Standard B16.22 or cast red bronze per ANSI Standard B16.18. Do not use T-drill.
3. Unions: Solder type, cast red bronze.
4. Joining Materials/Methods
a. Canfield, Silvabrite or equal lead free solder with a non-corrosive water based flux. b. 15% silver brazing alloy, water based silver brazing flux. Silver content must be clearly identified on the brazing rod.
5. Connections
a. Copper to dissimilar metals: dielectric connector.
b. Copper to threaded connections: cast brass adapters.
2.03 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Inside Building (to 5'-0" outside building line).
1. Water Piping: Above grade, Type L drawn temper, joining methods, soldered connections, below grade, Type K drawn temper copper tubing, joining methods, brazed connections.
2. Plastic pipe and fittings shall not be used inside of buildings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING
A. Water piping
1. Run water piping generally level. No piping shall be installed to cause an unusual noise from the flow of water under normal conditions.
2. Adapters: Wrought copper male adapters shall be used wherever it is necessary to connect copper tubing to a valve or tee having threaded connections.
3. Install Bare Metal Pipe Isolators: Stoneman "Trisolator", Superstrut "Cush-a-strip", Unistrut on all hot and cold domestic water piping.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 22 11 16 – 3
A. Water Sterilization
1. Contractor shall provide all ports, valves and isolation of new piping for testing.
2. After installation and before installing valves or making final connections, flush or purge piping systems clean of foreign substances; use water to flush piping conducting liquids and compressed air to clear piping conducting gases.
3. After completing cold and heated water systems, disinfect in accordance with curre nt requirements of U.S. Public Health Department. Use 50 parts per million of chlorine with 8 hour retention and flush to leave a residual no greater than supply source. Submit written certification of disinfecting completion by independent laboratory. After sterilization take at lease one (1) water sample per floor and have analyzed for "E-coli" to submit test results.
3.03 PIPING TESTING: TESTING CRITERIA
System Medium Pressure Duration
Water Water 150 psig 4 hours
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 22 05 00 applies to this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes all plumbing (equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, specialties) inside the building(s) and outside the building(s) to the point of connection to site plumbing systems.
B. Provide complete plumbing systems including:
1. Service connections to existing on-site utilities, and stubs for future connection to equipment provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications.
2. All piping systems for conduction of soil, waste, and other fluids or gases as shown or specified for plumbing work.
3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective c overings, piping, and other piping accessories as shown or specified for plumbing work.
4. All plumbing equipment and auxiliary items as specified herein or shown on the drawings.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 05 00 - Plumbing
B. Section 22 07 00 - Insulation
C. Section 21 00 00 - Fire Protection
D. Section 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, latest edition.
1.05 REFERENCES
A. Pipes and Tubes
1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, Schedule 40, seamless, black or galvanized, plain ends.
2. Copper Drainage Tube: ASTM B306, Type DWV, drawn temper.
3. Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI 301.
B. Fittings
1. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI B16.22.
2. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, ASTM B584.
3. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Threaded -Joint Pressure Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.15, ASTM B584.
4. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Classes 150 and 300.
5. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and- socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
6. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A733, made of ASTM A53 or ASTM A106, Schedule 40, seamless, galvanized, carbon-steel pipe.
7. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Classes 150 and 300; hexagonal stock; with ball - and-socket joint; metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; and female threaded ends with threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
8. Galvanized, Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Classes 125 and 250; standard pattern; with threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 – 2
9. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.29.
10. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint, DWV Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23.
11. Plastic Pipe Sleeves: ASTM C564 rubber for cast-iron soil pipe and ASTM F477 elastomeric seal.
C. Joining Materials
1. CISPI Couplings for Hubless, Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: CISPI 310, having ASTM C564 neoprene sealing sleeve, with 300 series stainless-steel, corrugated shield-and- clamp assembly.
2. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32, alloys to suit system requirements.
3. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, alloys to suit system requirements.
4. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
D. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTMF477, elastomeric gasket.
1.06 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural members shall not be cut or modified in any manner without specific instructions from the structural engineer. Where possible, offset vents and pipes rising in walls, concealed above ceilings, below plates and rise through roof. Where this is not possible, install vents and pipes through plates as detailed on structural drawings.
1.07 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a general statement of materials and methods along with manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for all equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, and plumbing specialties to be installed.
B. Record Drawings: Per specification section 22 05 00 requirements.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Per specification section 22 05 00 requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Adapters: Wrought copper male adapters shall be used wherever it is necessary to connect copper tubing to a valve or "tee" having threaded connections.
2.02 PIPE, FITTING, AND JOINING MATERIALS
A. Hubless Cast-Iron/Sleeve-Clamped Joints
1. Pipe: Service weight cast iron, hubless, with hot coal tar pitch coating inside and outside, per Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute Standard 301.
2. Fittings: Hubless type, Tyler No-Hub Coupling, each matched with pipe and identified with the manufacturer's name or trademark, the Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute symbol, and the pipe size. Those for connections to other types of piping - approved cast-iron adapter/transition type.
3. Joining Materials/Methods: Husky Series 4000 (Blue shield) or Mission Heavy Weight Orange shield), 4-band, on pipes over 3”, neoprene sleeve type conforming to ASTM C564 specifically designed for connecting hubless cast-iron pipe, coated with manufacturer's recommended lubricant before installing; four type 304 stainless steel band clamps with a type 305 stainless steel worm drive screw, and corrugated shield over sleeve; use standard, 4-band, no-hub couplings on 3” and less.
1) “Tyler, Standard”, two band stainless steel coupling, Stainless Steel screw housing, Stainless Steel shield, shall be used for vent piping and sizes and is allowed for sanitary waste of size 2” of less.
4. Wedge lock joints at rainwater leaders to underground drain.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 – 3
5. Cleanout Plugs: Use Armite Joint Seal compound No. 411, or Enterprise Commercial Thread-Seal.
B. Steel/Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
1. Pipe: Galvanized steel per ASTM A-120, threaded ends, standard weight Schedule 40.
2. Fittings: Cast-iron threaded drainage type, black coated, with recessed shoulder and pitched threads, per ASTM A-126, Class B.
C. Copper DWV Pipe: DWV drainage tubing per ASTM B-306-86, plain ends for pipe 1 ½” and larger.
1. Fittings shall be solder type, wrought copper drainage fittings per ANSI Standard B16.29-
86. 2. Joining Materials/Methods: Canfield, Silvabrite or equal lead free solder with a non-corrosive water based flux.
3. Connections:
a. Copper to dissimilar metals: dielectric connector.
b. Copper to threaded connections: cast brass adapters.
D. Steel/Threaded Fittings
1. Pipe: Black or galvanized steel per ASTM A-53 seamless, threaded ends, standard weight Schedule 40 or Schedule 80.
2. Fittings
a. Black or galvanized (to match pipe) banded malleable iron, threaded, ASTM A-197, 150 lb. standard or 300 lb. extra heavy per ANSI Standard B16.3 (to match pipe schedule).
b. Black or galvanized (to match pipe) banded cast iron, threaded, per ASTM A-126 Class B, 125 lb. standard or 250 lb. extra heavy per ANSI Standard B16.4 (to match pipe schedule).
3. Unions: AAR 300 lb. malleable iron, black or galvanized (to match pipe).
4. Joining Materials/Methods
a. Rectorseal or pure lead and graphite thread lubricant. b. Permacel, P-412 1/2" wide teflon pipe joint sealant.
2.03 PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A. Inside Building (to 5'-0" outside building line).
1. Soil, waste and vent piping
a. Below slab, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated for sizes 2 1/2" and smaller. Above floor from 6" above slab shall be galvanized steel pipe or service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated for sizes 2 1/2" and smaller. Urinal waste shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, asphaltic coated. Sizes 3" and larger shall be service weight cast iron soil pipe and fitting s, asphaltic coated.
b. Fittings
1) Contractor may use "No-Hub" "Husky" joints per manufacturers published instructions for installation. No-Hub fittings for waste and soil pipe shall be four band stainless steel type for all pipe sizes.
a) Two band stainless steel couplings, Stainless Steel screw housing, Stainless Steel shield may be used for waste piping of size 2” and less. 2) “Tyler, Standard”, two band stainless steel coupling, Stainless Steel screw housing, Stainless Steel shield, shall be used for vent piping. c. As an alternate use, copper DWV Pipe.
2. Condensate Drain Piping:
a. Inside buildings provide ASTM B88, Type M copper tubing and fittings. Provide Wye fittings with capped cleanout plug for tubing up to 1 inch size. Provide wrought or cast DWV fittings for sizes 1-1/4 inch and larger.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 – 4
b. Outside buildings provide ASTM B88, Type L copper pipe and fittings, cast iron drain pipe and fittings or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe and cast iron drain or vent fittings.]
c. Connect condensate drains to mechanical equipment per equipment manufacturer's recommendations; provide P-trap where required. Slope piping to drain, with 1 inch in 10 foot minimum pitch. Provide di-electric couplings or unions at connections to dissimilar materials.
d. Where Drawings indicate installation of mechanical equipment on spring isolation rails spring mounted curbs, or spring hangers, provide threaded metal connector at mechanical equipment, Metraflex Model SST, or equal by Unisource Mfg. Co., or Flexicraft Industries. Arrange flexible connection to ensure drainage of condensate, and support flexible connection at each end of connector, to ensure proper alignment. e. Where condensate drain P-traps are required, install trap using Wye fitting on inlet and outlet of trap. Provide cap on top of each Wye, made removable for cleaning and inspection. Drill 1/8 inch diameter hole in cap at outlet of the trap to allow venting of the system. Minimum depth of trap should be 4 inches, or as recommended by the manufacturer in printed literature.
f. Provide cleanout tees or “Y” at each change in direction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions, as specified herein, and as detailed on the drawings.
3.02 PIPING
A. Sewer Piping: Run all horizontal sanitary piping inside of the building at a uniform grade of not less than ¼" per foot unless otherwise noted on the drawings. Sewers shall have invert elevations as shown and slope uniformly between given elevations. All drainage piping shall be run as straight as possible and shall have long radius bends. All offsets shall be made at an angle of 45 degrees or less. All vent piping shall be graded so as to free itself quickly of any water or condensation. Where possible, groups of vent risers shall be jointed togethe r with one enlarged outlet through roof.
1. Install clean-outs of the same diameter of pipe in all horizontal soil and waste lines where indicated and at all points of change in direction and at base of all soil or waste drops.
Locate-clean outs not less than 18” from building construction so as to provide sufficient space for rodding. No horizontal runs of more than 100 feet shall be without clean -out.
2. Clean-outs in floors shall be protected with a cover taped in place and removed at completion of concrete work.
3. Provide trap at each inlet to sanitary sewer system. Provide trap primers where shown and as required by code.
B. Condensate drain piping
1. Provide "P" trap having 2" minimum trap seal.
2. Install trap with top of trap outlet 2" minimum below bottom of condensate collection pan, and within 12" of pan outlet.
3. Make changes in direction in the condensate drain line using tees; fit the free leg of the tee with a screwed plug for clean-outs. Provide additional such clean-outs where required by code or where necessary for cleaning drain line.
4. Extend condensate drain line to appropriate disposal point as shown on contract drawings.
5. Insulation: Provide insulation as shown or specified (Section 22 07 00).
3.03 VENT LOCATIONS
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT 22 13 16 – 5
A. Plumbing fixture vents have been combined wherever possible to minimize the number of roof penetrations.
B. Roof penetrations have been coordinated with penetrations of other trades, etc.
C. Plumbing contractor shall not shift or relocate vents through the roof or other penetrations from the locations shown without prior approval of the Engineer.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Testing:
1. Testing Criteria
System Medium Pressure Duration
Drainage and Vent Water 10 ft water 15 minutes
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALITIES 22 13 19 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Section 22 01 00 applies to this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes all plumbing (equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, specialties) inside the building(s) and outside the building(s) to the point of connection to site plumbing systems.
B. Provide complete plumbing systems including:
1. Service connections to existing on-site utilities, and stubs for future connection to equipment provided under the work of this Section or other Sections of the Specifications.
2. All piping systems for conduction of cold water, heated water, soil, waste, fuel gas, and other fluids or gases as shown or specified for plumbing work.
3. All valves, piping supports, piping penetration auxiliaries, piping protective coverings, piping, and other piping accessories as shown or specified for plumbing work.
4. All plumbing equipment and auxiliary items as specified herein or shown on the drawings.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 05 00 - Plumbing
B. Section 22 07 00 - Insulation
C. Section 21 00 00 - Fire Protection
D. Section 23 00 00 - Heating, Ventilating, & Air Conditioning PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPING ACCESSORIES
A. Cleanouts: Model Numbers are Josam.
1. Vertical: polished bronze cover.
2. Floor: nickel-bronze cover. Provide carpet clean out marker in carpeted areas.
3. Grade: C.I. with brass plug set in concrete.
4. Use floor clean outs located in walks.
2.02 PIPING PENETRATION AUXILLIARIES
A. Sleeves Below Slab or Grade: Metraseal model MS or equal with schedule 80 PVC sleeve. The seal shall be capable of withstanding a hydrostatic pressure of 20 psig. The seal shall be constructed of synthetic rubber with heavy-duty plastic pressure plates. All bolts and nuts shall be constructed of stainless steel.
1. Escutcheons: Polished chrome plated brass or painted metal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions, as specified herein, and as detailed on the drawings.
3.02 VALVES AND FLANGES
A. Cathodic Protection: Install insulated flanges or dielectric unions at points of connection between pipes and equipment as follows: (1) between copper or brass piping and steel or cast iron pipe. (2) Between copper or brass piping and any steel material.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALITIES 22 13 19 – 2
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Testing: Testing Criteria
System Medium Pressure Duration
Drainage and Vent Water 10 feet water 15 minutes
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SPECIAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work of this section.
B. Section 22 05 00 applies to this section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This section includes all plumbing fixtures.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 22 05 00 – Common Work Results For Plumbing
B. Section 22 07 00 - Insulation
C. Section 21 00 00 - Fire Protection
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All plumbing fixtures and equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, latest edition.
B. 2022 CBC 11B-604
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a general statement of materials and methods along with manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions for all equipment, fixtures, pipe and fittings, and plumbing specialties to be installed.
B. Record Drawings: Per specification section 22 05 00 requirements.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Per specification section 22 05 00 requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. See fixture and equipment schedules on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. All fixtures shall be furnished as scheduled. All finished plumbing shall be accurately lined up and where batteries of fixtures occur, special care shall be taken with the roughing-in and finished plumbing.
B. The number and position of all plumbing fixtures are shown on the plumbing drawings. Consult architectural drawings for the location dimensions and mounting heights of fixtures. Heights shall comply with the C.B.C., the latest handicapped requirement, and all ADA requirements.
C. All water supplied to fixtures shall be provided with Speedway loose key compression shut -off stops. Combination fixtures shall have compression stop on each water supply fitting.
Concealed stops shall be Crane 9H-313 or equal.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 – 2
D. All finish for exposed metal trim on any fixture shall be polished chromium plated. This shall include wall flanges, nuts, and washers. Handles on all faucets and stops shall be of all metal, chromium plated. Porcelain caps secured with putty shall be provided and installed for all exposed bolt heads.
E. All fixtures shall be properly and securely installed and supported as required and approved.
Fixtures set against concrete walls shall be bolted thereto. Fixtures secured to partitions shall be securely bolted to the wall carrier fittings with foot supports, and shall be provided in types as required to suit the particular installation and fixture.
F. Connection between fixtures and flanges on soil pipe shall be made absolutely gas tight and water tight with graphite type gaskets (wall hung fixture) or Fedar's closet setting compound (floor outlet fixtures). Rubber gaskets, or putty will not be permitted.
G. Fixtures not having integral traps shall be provided with "P" traps of chromium plated solderless seamless brass with trap screw at bottom and connected to concealed waste in wall sanitary fittings. All trap tail pieces shall be 17 gauge minimum.
H. Unions on waste pipes on fixture side of traps may be slip or flange joints with soft rubber or lead gaskets.
I. Comply with State handicapped requirements regarding flow control devices, fixture mounting heights, insulation of piping under fixtures, etc.
J. Furnish and install stainless steel Hudee frames for counter mounted fixtures unless "Self-Rimming".
K. Grout all voids between fixtures and adjacent surfaces with 100% white Dow Silicon sealant.
L. All hot water fixtures except janitors sinks to be provided with thermostatic mixing valves (see Contract Drawings) set at 110F (confirm with temperatures listed on contract drawings and notify engineer of record for any discrepancies).
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 01 00 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
1.02 ALL LEVELS OF 23 00 00.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General:
1. Refer to Section 01 00 00.
B. Preparations.
1. Prior to data collection and compilation, prepare and submit in duplicate an outline of the proposed organization and content.
2. Compilation: Prepare and collect data concurrently with construction progress. Compile per submitted outline.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Form of Submittals
1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner’s personnel. a. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, “OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION”. List:
b. Title of Project.
c. Provide indexed tabs.
d. Identify of separate structure as applicable.
e. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual.
2. Format:
a. PDF.
b. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data.
c. Drawings:
3. Provide description of product and major component parts of equipment.
4. Provide indexed tabs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. General: Record data and operation and maintenance data are complimentary. Submittal items which may be required under both categories may be included only under one submittal if a statement to that effect is included in the other submittal.
B. Quality Assurance
1. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel.
a. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. b. Familiar with requirements of this Section.
C. Content of Manual
1. Provide table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order. a. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. b. List, with each product, name, address and telephone number of:
1) Subcontractor or installer.
2) Maintenance contractor, as appropriate.
3) Identify area of responsibility of each.
4) Local source of supply for parts and replacement.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 01 00 – 2
c. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents.
2. Product Data:
a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to:
1) Clearly identify specific product or part installed. 2) Clearly identify data applicable to installation.
3) Delete references to inapplicable information.
3. Drawings:
a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate. 1) Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 2) Control and flow diagrams.
b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation
c. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.
4. Supplement product data for the particular installation. a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
5. Factory Authorized Start-Up Report.
a. Provide a factory start-up report for each piece of equipment. Contractor start-up reports, unless contractor is a factory authorized representative will not be allowed.
6. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued. a. Provide information sheet for Owner’s personnel, give:
1) Proper procedures in event of failure.
2) Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds.
D. Manual for Equipment and Systems:
1. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate. a. Description of unit and component parts.
1) Function normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. b. Operating procedures:
1) Start-up, break-in, routing and normal operating instructions. 2) Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. 3) Summer and winter operating instructions.
4) Special operating instructions.
c. Maintenance Procedures:
1) Routing operations.
2) Guide to “trouble-shooting”
3) Disassembly, repair and reassemble.
4) Alignment, adjusting and checking.
d. Servicing and lubrication schedule.
1) List lubricants required.
e. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer. g. Original manufacture’s parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.
1) Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
2) Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.
h. As-installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. i. Each contractor’s coordination drawings:
1) As-installed color-coded piping diagrams.
j. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve. k. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEMS 23 01 00 – 3
l. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. m. Content for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate. n. Description of system and component parts.
1) Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 2) Performance curves, engineering data and tests.
3) Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. o. Circuit directories of panel boards.
1) Electric service.
2) Controls.
3) Communications
p. As-installed color coded wiring diagrams.
q. Operating procedures.
1) Routing and normal operating instructions.
2) Sequences required.
3) Special operating instructions.
r. Maintenance procedures.
1) Routine operations.
2) Guide to “trouble shooting”.
3) Disassembly, repair and reassembly.
4) Adjustment and checking.
s. Manufacturer’s printed operating and maintenance instructions. t. List of original manufacturer’s spare parts, manufacturer’s current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.
u. Other data as required under pertinent sections of specifications. v. Additional requirements for operating and maintenance data: Respective sections of Specifications.
E. Instruction of Owner’s Personnel.
1. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner’s designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems
2. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction. a. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SPECIAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work of this section.
B. This section applies to all Division 23 Mechanical Sections.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install all mechanical work shown on the drawings, specified herein, and as required for a complete and functional installation.
B. This section includes materials and methods applicable to the work described in all Division 23 Mechanical Sections. Specific work requirements of individual Mechanical Sections take precedence if in conflict with requirements of this Section.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 26 - Electrical Work
B. Division 22 - Plumbing
1.04 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. For purposes of clearness and legibility, drawings are essentially diagrammatic and, although size and location of equipment are drawn to scale wherever possible, the Contractor shall make use of all data in all the contract documents and shall verify this information at building site.
B. Information presented on Drawings and in the Specifications is based upon latest data available during their preparation. The Drawings and Specifications are for the assistan ce and guidance of the Contractor and exact locations, distances, levels, etc. will be governed by the structures and the site the contractor shall accept same with this understanding.
C. The drawings indicate required size and points of termination of pipes, and suggest proper routes to conform to structure, avoid obstructions and preserve clearances. However, it is not intended that drawings indicate all necessary offsets, and it shall be the work of the Contractor to make the installation in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstruction, preserve headroom and keep openings and passageways clear.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Contractor shall be responsible for delivery, storage, protection and placing of all equipment and materials.
B. Equipment stored and installed at the job site shall be protected from dust, water or other damage. Cover all equipment stored exposed to weather.
1.06 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural members shall not be cut or modified in any manner without specific instructions from the structural engineer.
1.07 CODES AND SAFETY ORDERS
A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest rules and regulations of the State Fire Marshall; the Safety Orders of the Division of Industrial Safety; the I.S.O. codes;
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 2
1. 2022 California Plumbing Code, Title 24, Part 5;
2. 2022 California Mechanical Code, Title 24, Part 4;
3. 2022 California Building Code, Title 24, Part 2;
4. NFPA Codes (versions as referenced in 2022 California Building Code, Title 24 Part 2, chapter 35 and 2022 California Fire Code, title 24, Part 9, chapter 80), and other applicable laws and regulations.
B. Nothing in the Drawings or Specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes.
C. Drawings and Specifications take precedence when work and materials called for exceed Code requirements.
1.08 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturer's Instructions:
1. When specifications require that installation comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.
2. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by specifications.
3. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
4. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with the Engineer for further instructions.
5. Do not proceed with work without clear understanding.
6. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to accommodate mechanical system installation.
7. Coordinate installation of supporting devices. Set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components during construction.
8. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access where concealed behind finished surfaces.
9. Coordinate with other trades equipment locations, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air inlets and outlets, and structural and architectural features. Provide information on location of piping and seismic bracing to other trades as required for a completely coordinated project.
1.09 PERMITS AND FEES
A. Obtain all permits and pay all required fees for permits and/or utility services. Inspections required during the course of construction shall be arranged as required. On completion of the work furnish the owners representative with certificates of inspection.
B. Include in bid all costs for gas service including meter, regulators and service line installed by a gas utility company or a gas utility company approved contractor.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Assume all responsibility for damage to adjoining properties; and restore property to its original condition, should damage occur as a result of the work of this section. Contractor shall thoroughly familiarize himself with all site conditions. Should utilities not shown on the drawings be found during excavations, promptly notify the Architect for instructions as to further action.
Failure to do so will make the Contractor liable for any and all damage thereto arising from his operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown on plans.
1.11 SUBMITTALS
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 3
A. General
1. A submittal schedule shall be issued by the contractor within 15 days of award of the contract. This schedule shall allow for timely review and approval as required by the contract documents.
2. These requirements apply only to substitutions, submittals, and shop drawings.
3. The contractor shall review all submittals prior to submission to the Architect. Submittals not reviewed by the contractor will be returned to the contractor and will not be reviewed.
4. Any deviations from specified requirements shall be clearly indicated in submittals.
5. Any errors in or omissions from submittals and any consequences of these are the responsibility of the Contractor.
6. Partial or incomplete submittals may be rejected as not complying with requirements; the Contractor shall be liable for any resultant consequences.
7. Delayed submittals may be rejected as not complying with requirements. Whether accepted or rejected, delayed submittals will not be considered justification for extension of contract time or similar relief.
8. Submittals not required or permitted by the Specifications but made at the option of the Contractor, will be returned without review unless accompanied with written valid justification.
9. Submittal items improperly included with those of another category (such as a proposed substitution included with shop drawing submittal) are not valid and will be returned without review.
10. Within 35 calendar days after award of the contract, and before fabrications and installation of any material or ordering of any materials, submit for approval one copy in PDF format of complete submittal data on specified and proposed substituted equipment and materials.
Submittals shall list all materials proposed identified with drawing symbols and specific data on equipment such as arrangements, performance curves, sizes, capacity, motor locations, and other pertinent data. Check all submittals for conformance to the requirements of the Construction Documents before forwarding to the architect for each item. No consideration will be given to substitutions submitted past 35 day limit. The contractor shall be responsible for all quantities and errors and omissions of submittals. Furnish samples when requested.
11. Equipment and materials specified as part of the specifications and drawings are listed by two manufacturers names. The first named manufacturer is the basis of design. The second named manufacturer has been determined to be an equivalent in quality or utility.
The second named has not been specifically determined to conform to the first named in size, layout, electrical power, voltage, or impacts to building structure. The contractor is bound by all requirements for substitutes, as described below, for all second named manufacturers and equivalent equipment or products.
12. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below.
13. Acceptance of a submittal does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for omissions from the submittal or errors in the submittal.
1.12 REVIEW
A. Submittals will be reviewed for general acceptability, not necessarily including all details. The engineers review is for general conformance with the design concept of the project and the information given in the contract documents. The contractor is solely responsible fo r confirming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction; coordinating the work with that of other trades and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. Corrections of comments made on this submittal during this review do not relieve contractor from compliance with the requirements of the contract documents or with its responsibilities listed herein.
1. Proposed substitutes will be judged not only for the acceptability of the item s themselves, but also how they will be used under the conditions of the particular project.
2. Proposed substitutions will be judged also for compliance with qualifications and conditions stipulated in paragraph 1.12.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 4
B. Each reviewed submittal will be marked to indicate review and directions as stated below.
1. Acceptance of a substitute does not waive the specified requirements.
2. Once a substitution is accepted, no revision or resubmittal may be made except for pressing and valid reason and after receipts of approval to do so.
1.13 REVIEW DIRECTIONS
A. The notation "No Exceptions Taken" indicates that no further submittal on the particular matter is required and that the Contractor may proceed with normally ensuing action. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions, shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data. The submittal has only been reviewed for general conformance with the design concept of the Contract Documents. The contractor is responsible for the dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at the job site; information that pertains solely to the fabrication process or to the means and methods of construction; coordination of the work of all trades; and performing all work in a safe and satisfactory manner. This notation does not modify the contractor's duty to comply with the contract documents.
B. The notation "Make Corrections Noted" indicates that no further submittal on the particular matter is required, but the Contractor shall make all changes or corrections noted (but no others) before proceeding with normally ensuing action. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions or shop drawings (but usually not record data or operation and maintenance data).
C. The notation "Amend and Resubmit" indicates that the submittal is not accepted and must be revised, resubmitted, and reviewed again. In the case of submittal on substitutions and shop drawings so noted, the Contractor shall not proceed with any normally ensuing action until the resubmittal is reviewed. The notation may be applied to submittals on substitutions, shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data.
D. The notation "Rejected - See Remarks" indicates that the submittal is not accepted and that resubmittal on the same subject matter is not allowed and will not be considered. The notation will be applied normally only to submittals on substitutions (usually not on shop drawings, record data, or operation and maintenance data).
E. The notation "Returned Without Review" indicates that the submittal or item has not been considered officially because it is either not proper, valid, required, or permitted by the Specifications and has no status or effect.
1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. The contractor is responsible for providing all shop drawings as described below so th at the design professional has the opportunity to determine if the contractor understands the contract documents. It is not the purpose of shop drawings to assure that the contractor is meeting the requirements of the contract documents. Review and approval of a submittal neither extends nor alters any contractual obligation.
B. Accompany all substituted equipment with shop drawings showing revised ductwork and/or piping layouts in order to ascertain that substituted equipment does not adversely affect layou t or work of others. Shop Drawings: The following conditions apply to shop drawings:
1. Shop drawings are not and do not become Contract Documents.
2. Processed shop drawing submittals and any instructions or requirements noted thereon are a part of the work, but they may not be used as a means of increasing the scope of the work.
3. If deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawing submittals and the Contract Documents are discovered either prior to or after the submittals are processed, the Contract Document requirements shall govern.
1.15 SUBSTITUTIONS
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 5
A. Whenever any equipment, material, or process is indicated or specified by patent of proprietary name and/or name of Manufacturer, in the Specifications and/or on the Drawings, it is understood that such specification is used to facilitate the description of the material and/or process and deemed to be followed by the words "or equal" unless noted "no substitute".
B. Substitute equipment and materials shall be equal in all respects including quality, arrangemen t, utility, physical size, capacity, and performance to those specified. Approval of substitute material will not relieve the contractor from complying with the requirement of the Drawings and Specifications. The contractor shall be responsible and at his own expense, for any changes caused by proposed substitutions which affect other parts of his own work or the work of other contractors.
C. The submittal of a proposed substitution shall clearly establish the following:
1. The item can be transported into and installed in the intended space and in the manner shown.
2. Required connections (electrical, piping, and other) can be properly made and adjoining work can be properly accomplished.
3. The proposed substitute is similar to and of substance equal to that specified, is suited to the same use as that specified, and will perform the functions required by the design.
4. Motors for proposed substitute equipment will have the same minimum differential between motor brake horsepower and motor nameplate horsepower as the specified equipment.
5. All performance requirements shall be at least equal to the specified product or equipment including noise levels, cooling capacity, heating capacity, air flow quantity, etc.
D. By submitting a proposed substitution, the Contractor agrees to the following:
1. He will assume full responsibility for any and all modifications and necessary alterations arising from the use of the substitute item or material including all cost incurred by all other trades.
2. He will assume full responsibility for any delay in the construction schedule resulting from the use of the substitution.
3. He will prove harmless and indemnify the Owner and the Owner's design consultants from real or alleged damages that may result from the installation, use, or performance of a substitute material or product.
E. The following conditions apply to substitutions:
1. Submittals of substitutions are not and do not become part of the Contract Documents.
2. Contractor shall not order, fabricate, use, or install any substitute product or procedure unless he has received acceptance of the substitute from the Engineer.
3. Should the Contractor install any substitute product in violation of the above he shall remove it and install the specified product at his own expense.
4. The Contractor shall provide a letter stating that all the above items shall apply to all substituted products and equipment.
5. Any submittal for substituted equipment or product that does not clearly show that the substituted item is equal shall be marked rejected and no further submittal shall be allowed on the substituted item. Provide in submittal format documentation that the proposed item is exactly as specified in the contract documents.
1.16 GUARANTEE
A. Guarantee all work for one year from date of acceptance, against all defects in materi al, equipment and workmanship including repair of damage to any part of the premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment and workmanship. Guarantee shall be on form supplied by the owner's representative.
1.17 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. The contractor is responsible to provide record drawings. Provide PDF drawings showing the actual location of all ductwork, piping and equipment. Dimension locations of underground
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 6
service mains and branches. Deliver the PDF drawings to the architect at the comp letion of the job for review and approval by the engineer.
B. Mark-up Procedure: During the construction period, maintain a complete, current set of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings uploaded and updated within the BLUEBEAM program for Project Record Document purposes. Label each document “AS-BUILT RECORD”. Keep all record documents current.
C. On completion of the Work the Contractor will provide one complete set of AS-BUILT RECORD Drawings in AutoCAD (drawing) file format and one complete set in Adobe PDF file format.
D. A reference by number to a Change Order, CCD, RFI, RFQ RFP, Field Order or other such document is not acceptable as sufficient record information on any record document. Do not conceal any Work until required record information has been recorded.
E. Contractor shall mark AS-BUILT Record Drawings to indicate the actual installation where the installation varies appreciably from the installation shown originally. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Items required to be marked include, but are not limited to:
1. Revisions or any modification to details shown on the Contract Drawings
2. Depths of various elements (sanitary sewer, water etc. in relation to main floor level or survey datum.
3. Horizontal and vertical location of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent surface improvements.
4. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction referenced to visible and accessible features of structure.
5. Locations of underground work, points of connection with existing utilities, changes in direction, valves, manholes, catch basins, capped stub outs, invert elevations and similar items
6. Actual equipment locations
a. Duct size and routing
7. Changes made by Change Order, CCD, ASI, or any other directive a. Details not on original Contract Drawings
b. Contractor shall mark completely and accurately AS-BUILT Record Drawing prints of Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is the most capable of showing actual physical conditions. Where Shop Drawings are marked, show cross -reference on Contract Drawings location.
c. Contractor shall mark AS-BUILT Record Drawing sets within BLUEBEAM with red markings; use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
d. Contractor shall mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.
e. Contractor shall note Contractor Change Directive numbers; Bid Alternat e numbers, if any, Change Order numbers, and similar identification.
f. Contractor shall be responsible for Mark-up: Where feasible, the individual or entity who obtained Project Record Drawing data, whether the individual or entity is the installer, Subcontractor or similar entity, is required to prepare the mark-up on AS- BUILT Record Drawings.
g. Accurately record information in an understandable and legible drawing technique. h. Record data as soon as possible after it has been obtained. In the case of concealed installations, record and check the mark-up prior to concealment.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 7
F. Contractor shall prepare Record Drawings: Immediately prior to inspection for Certification of Substantial Completion of the Work, review completed marked-up AS-BUILT Record Drawings with District, Project Inspector and Architect to ensure accuracy of information. Once accuracy of information is confirmed, prepare and submit a full electronic set, professionally drafted in AutoCAD format, of as-built Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on print sets. Delete, redraw, and/or add details and notations where applicable. Identify and date each Drawing; include the printed designation “AS-BUILT RECORD DRAWING” and the date prepared in a prominent location on each Drawing.
2. Distribution: Whether or not changes and additional information were recorded, organize the original marked-up set of drawings that were maintained during the construction period within BLUEBEAM into manageable sets. The sets should be labeled with all appropriate identification, including titles, dates and other information on cover sheets and submit to District.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Shop drawings:
1. Make all drawings to an appropriate scale, large enough to show all pertinent aspects of the item and the method of its connection into the work.
2. Make each drawing sheet in a reproducible form such a tracing, sepia, or Mylar transparency.
B. Grouping: Combine submittals in logical groupings; for example, submit Shop Drawings grouped by Sections of the Specifications, arranged in the specified sequence.
C. Shop Drawings: Four blue or black line prints of each for the Engineer.
D. Content:
1. Shop drawings may be:
a. Drawings or diagrams prepared by the Contractor, a supplier , a manufacturer, or other.
b. Typewritten data or descriptions.
c. Manufacturer’s printed brochures, descriptions, charts, instructions, or data sheets.
E. Timing: Submit all shop drawings prior to installation of any items included in submittal.
2.02 CORROSION PROOFING
A. Corrosion Proofing / U.V. Protection: Products which will be installed outdoors, exposed to the weather, exposed to moisture, or other potentially damaging conditions shall be constructed to resist the effects of such exposure.
B. Exterior casings shall have lapped or gasketed joints effectively sealed to prevent intrusion of moisture or other injurious substances.
C. Casings, ducts, pipes, or product items shall be constructed of materials which are fully resistant to harmful substances they may normally contact, or (if ferrous) shall be galvanized after fabrication, or shall be fully protected from such substances by paint or other coating in appropriate thickness or number of coats.
D. All bolts, nuts, screws, and washers shall be galvanized unless specified to be plated or unprotected.
E. Any exposed plastic pipe must have a U.V. inhibitor.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 8
2.03 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
A. All material and equipment shall be new, of the type, capacity and quality specified and free from defects. All materials and equipment shall be of the same brand or manufacturer throughout for each class of material or equipment wherever possible.
2.04 FILTERS
A. A complete set of filters shall be supplied for use during the construction period. A complete set of new filters shall be installed before testing and balancing.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
A. Furnish and install miscellaneous equipment and materials required for the systems described whether or not specifically shown.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Do not install any equipment, valve, control, motor, filter, or any other device requiring maintenance or service in an inaccessible location or position. Install access doors as specified herein to render all such equipment serviceable whether specifically shown on the plans or not. Maintain code clearance to all equipment. Coordinate location of doors with lights, etc., and locate symmetrically with same.
B. Observations: Check all project drawings and specifications; report any discrepancies before proceeding with the work and in time to avoid unnecessary rework.
C. Investigation: Examine the areas, conditions, and status of other work contiguous or connecting to the work to be performed; ensure that the time of installation is coordinated with other work.
D. Interruptions of Service: Portions of this work may involve connection to existing work, facilities, or utilities ties and may require interrupting shutdowns of same. Carefully plan, coordinate and execute such work so that any interruptions will be kept to a minimum in time and occurrence .
Submit request for shutdowns and make shutdowns only after receiving written approval from the Owner.
E. Other: Correct any unsatisfactory conditions that may impede proper execution of the work.
Ensure that all arrangements, personnel, materials, and tools are appropriate and adequate before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Material and equipment incorporated in the work shall be used or applied only for the purpose intended or specified.
2. Install piping and ductwork and all equipment that requires access with minimum vertical and horizontal clearances required by OSHA for service.
3. All mechanical systems such as ductwork, pipes and all other equipment shall have 2 inches minimum clearance.
4. Do not proceed with work without clear understanding.
3.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS:
A. When specifications require that installation comply with manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation.
B. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by specifications.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 9
C. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accordance with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements.
D. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, consult with the Engineer for further instructions.
E. Do not proceed with work without clear understanding.
3.04 DEMOLITION
A. General
1. Procedures shall be determined by the contractor.
2. Demolition work shall not be commenced until all temporary work such as fences, barricades, and any required warning lights and apparatus are furnished and installed and as required by law, regulation, or ordinance, or elsewhere in this specification.
3. Demolition work shall proceed in such a manner as to minimize the spread of dust and flying particles and to provide safe working conditions for personnel.
4. Fires and explosives shall not be permitted.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Contractor shall conform to all Federal, State, and local ordinances related to the protection of the public and Contractor’s personnel and the flow of traffic/ Provide protection for persons and property throughout the progress of the work.
B. Existing work damaged by the contractor in the execution of this Contract shall be restored to former condition by the contractor to the satisfaction of the Owner without an increase in the Contract Sum and without an extension of the Contract Time.
3.06 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS
A. All materials and equipment not scheduled to be salvaged, including debris and all rejected salvaged materials, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of off site in a legal manner. Location of dump and length of hall shall be the contractor’s responsibility.
3.07 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT, PIPING AND DUCT WORK
A. Where job conditions do not permit the installation of piping, ductwork, etc. in the location shown, it shall be brought to the engineer's attention immediately before fabric ation of ductwork, piping, etc. and the relocation required shall be determined in a joint conference.
B. The contractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items installed without first obtaining the architect’s or engineer’s approval. Remove and relocate such items at The contractors expense as so directed by the architect or engineer.
C. Where piping or ducting is left exposed within a room, run in vertical or horizontal planes.
Maintain uniform spacing between parallel lines and/or adjacent wall, floor or ceiling surfaces.
D. Horizontal runs of plumbing and/or electrical conduit suspended from ceilings shall provide for maximum clearance.
E. Make minor changes in locations of equipment, piping, ducts, etc. from locations shown including minor offsets when directed by the engineer, at no additional cost to the owner.
3.08 CARE AND CLEANING
A. Clean and adjust all equipment at completion of installation to provide operating conditions satisfactory to the engineer. Remove broken, damaged or defective parts; re pair or replace as directed by engineer. Remove surface material and debris resulting from this work when directed.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 10
3.09 FLASHINGS
A. Furnish and install a waterproof flashing for each pipe, duct, or other penetration through roof or wall. Flashings shall be 4 lb. seamless lead flashings Semco 1100 series with counter flashing as detailed, except in metal roofs flashing for pipes through roof shall be furnished by the roofing contractor. Where details are not specifically delineated, submit details for review.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Painting is included under the Painting and Finishing Section. It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor to properly protect all equipment and controls during painting operations and the Mechanical Contractor shall repair and/or replace any item damaged due to painting that was not properly protected.
3.11 ACCESS DOORS
A. Provide access doors to all concealed equipment, valves, controls, etc. Locate doors where shown or to be coordinated and symmetrically located with lights, diffusers, etc. Access doors furnished by the mechanical contractor shall be installed by the general contractor.
3.12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide working space around electrical equipment in compliance with the applicable Code and all Safety Orders.
B. Coordinate the Mechanical Work with the Electrical Work to comply with the above. Furnish and set in place all motors and duct or pipe installed controls.
C. Location of all new switches shall be verified with the architect or architect before roughing -in.
Furnish necessary control diagrams and instruction for the proper installation of the controls.
D. Assume responsibility for the proper supervision and testing of the controls for sequence of operation.
E. Motors and control equipment shall conform to the Standards of the Nat ional Electrical Manufacturers Association.
F. All equipment electrical characteristics shall be as noted on the drawings, or as specified. Verify before ordering any equipment.
G. Before permitting operation of any equipment which is furnished, installed or mo dified under this contract, review all wiring connections that pertain to mechanical equipment or work, and verify that these connections are correct.
H. Ascertain that the over-load protection devices installed are of the correct type, rating and setting to properly protect this equipment.
3.13 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL
A. Prior to final inspection or acceptance, fully instruct Owner's designated operating and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment and maintenance of products, equipment and systems.
B. Operating and maintenance manual shall constitute the basis of instruction.
1. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance.
3.14 RECORD DATA
A. Compilation
1. Record and collect information concurrently with construction progress and date all entries; make drawing entries within 24 hours after occurrence of change or installation requiring
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 – 11
recording. Any concealed work covered before recording data shall be uncovered as directed or as necessary to obtain data.
2. Record information on drawing prints using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil); describe clearly by note or graphic line as appropriate.
B. Locate any concealed work adequately to allow future access with reasonable ease and accuracy.
1. Identify the plan location of all stub outs, pipe lines, etc., which are buried or concealed in the structure, whether installed where shown on the contract drawings or in a different location; show actual field dimensions from column lines, wall lines, or other permanent reference lines or points.
2. In many cases on the contract drawings, the arrangement of conduits, pipes, ducts, and similar items is shown schematically rather than as a precise scaled layout. Identify the actual location of these with horizontal and vertical dimensions. If such lines are exposed or readily accessible, omit dimensional identification.
3. When any work is installed of size, dimension, slope, or location different from that shown on the contract drawings, note the deviation on the Project Record set. If the variations are substantial or cannot be shown clearly on the record drawings, make a new drawing and attach to the Record set.
C. On other documents
1. Where changes occur in specifications, clearly indicate same in ink, colored pencil, or rubber stamp.
2. Where installed equipment differs from that specified (e.g., by accepted substitution or change order) note in the specifications and include complete data on same.
3.15 PROJECT CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
A. A representative of Peters Engineering shall be notified by the contractor at the following stages of construction before covering or enclosing work:
1. Completion of all work above ceilings, before ceiling tiles are installed
2. Completion of all work
3. Completion of corrected items
B. The contractor shall give such notice 48 hours prior to completion of the particular phase. The purpose of notification is so that the required review can be made without delaying construction.
When notified, Peters Engineering will advise the contractor if a field rev iew of the construction will be made in 48 hours or that a review will not be required. If the contractor fails to notify Peters Engineering as required, and/or covers or closes in any construction before required reviews, he may be required to uncover the work for observation.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 23 05 13 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SEE SECTION 23 05 00
1.02 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Where material or equipment is specified to conform to referenced standards, it shall be assumed that the most recent edition of the standard in effect at the time of bid shall be used.
1. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council
2. AFBMA - Anti Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association
3. AMCA - Air Moving and Control Association Inc.
a. Standard 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans
4. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
5. ARI - Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute
6. ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
7. ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
8. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
9. CCR - California Code of Regulations
a. Title 8 - Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 7; General Industry Safety Orders, Articles 31 through 36
10. CSA – Canadian Standards Association International
11. CSFM - California State Fire Marshal
12. NCPWB - National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau
13. NIST - National Institute of Standards and Technology
14. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers' Association
15. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
16. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Act
17. SMACNA - Duct Manuals
18. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. The publications listed below form part of this specification; comply with provisions of these publications except as otherwise shown or specified.
a. California Building Code, 2022.
b. California Electrical Code, 2022.
c. California Energy Code, 2022.
d. California Fire Code, 2022.
e. California Green Building Standards Code, 2022.
f. California Mechanical Code, 2022.
g. California Plumbing Code, 2022.
h. California Code of Regulations, Title 24.
i. California Health and Safety Code.
j. CAL-OSHA.
k. California State Fire Marshal, Title 19 CCR.
l. National Fire Protection Association.
m. Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
n. Other applicable state laws.
2. Nothing in Drawings or specifications shall be construed to permit work not conforming to these codes, or to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. It is not the intent of Drawings or specifications to repeat requirements of codes except where necessary for clarity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MOTOR AND STARTERS
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC 23 05 13 – 2
A. Motors furnished as part of mechanical equipment shall be of size indicated and shall have starting torque sufficient to start and drive equipment load to which they are connected.
B. Electric motors shall be NEMA Premium efficiency. Provide one of the following or an equal product:
1. U.S. Motors
2. Century Electric
3. General Electric
4. Lincoln
5. Gould
C. Motor enclosures shall be either Open drip proof for general use or Totally enclosed as listed on contract drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide working space around electrical equipment in compliance with the applicable Code and all Safety Orders.
B. Coordinate the Mechanical Work with the Electrical Work to comply with the above. Furnish and set in place all motors and duct or pipe installed controls.
C. Location of all new switches shall be verified with the architect or architect before roughing -in.
Furnish necessary control diagrams and instruction for the proper installation of the controls.
D. Assume responsibility to ensure that all motors are connected with flexible conduit per Division 26 requirements.
E. Assume responsibility for the proper supervision and testing of the controls for sequence of operation.
F. Motors and control equipment shall conform to the Standards of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
G. All equipment electrical characteristics shall be as noted on the drawings, or as specified. Verify before ordering any equipment.
H. Before permitting operation of any equipment which is furnished, installed or modified under this contract, review all wiring connections that pertain to mechanical equipment or work, and verify that these connections are correct.
I. Ascertain that the over-load protection devices installed are of the correct type, rating and setting to properly protect this equipment.
J. Where equipment motors are to be electrically interlocked with other equipment for simultaneous operation, utilize mechanical equipment wiring diagrams to coordinate with the electrical systems so that proper wiring of the equipment involved is affected.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR HVAC DUCTWORK 23 05 30 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work in this section.
1.02 SECTIONS INCLUDE
A. General: Refer to Section 23 05 00, Mechanical - General.
B. Work Included: Provide all ductwork and ductwork accessories, auxiliaries, and adjuncts for all and systems as specified or shown.
C. Work Described Elsewhere: HVAC piping, equipment, and controls are specified in other HVAC Sections.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. All Sections of Division 23.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Air Balancing: Provide submittals for air balancing work as specified in Section 23 05 93 HVAC General.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The contractor shall provide all miscellaneous metal to bridge between structural beams to provide connection for duct supports. As an alternate ductwork may be supported from the roof deck if approved by the owner and structural engineer.
B. Rectangular Ducts (Horizontal):
1. Up to 30" duct width: Two 1-1/2" wide 16-gauge galvanized steel straps, with gauge as listed on sheet M001, bolted to opposite sides of duct and firmly secured to overhead construction. Each strap must also be turned and screwed to bottom of duct.
C. Round Ducts (Horizontal):
1. Up to 40” in diameter: Two (2) 1-1/2” wide galvanized sheet metal straps, with gauge as listed on sheet M001, firmly secured to overhead construction and extending around the entire perimeter of the duct and secured to the duct. Provide bracing to prevent duct sway as specified above for rectangular duct.
D. Vertical Ducts:
1. Rectangular: Unistrut, Powerstrut, P-1000 channel riveted or bolted to side of duct and secured to the structure at each floor or other such level.
2. Round: Fabricate two-piece angle iron collar, rivet or bolt to duct, secured to structure per above.
E. Structure Attachments: See Contract Documents
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCTWORK SUPPORTS
A. Supports
1. Install ductwork in accordance with applicable details, SMACNA "Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems, 1991 ed." recommendations, manufacturer's
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR HVAC DUCTWORK 23 05 30 – 2
recommendations, and best practice, coordinate all ductwork support connection with the Structural Engineer.
2. Install ducts rigidly, securely, and air tight.
3. Support ducts independently of ductwork - connected equipment and visa-versa.
4. Penetrations:
a. Description: All penetrations of walls separating shall have a minimum clearance of 1/2-inch and a maximum clearance of 3/4 inch.
b. Materials: A minimum 1.5 lbs/cu.ft. fiberglass insulations shall be used and a nonhardening caulking compound.
c. Installation: The opening around the penetration shall be filled loosely with the fiberglass insulation. The opening is then to be sealed airtight with the non -hardening caulking compound. Pipes, ducts, etc., shall be supported on either side of the wall with supports to roof structure.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 – 1
SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SEE SECTION 23 05 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 IDENTIFICATION
A. Equipment: Black Phenolic Plates engraved with 1/2" high white letters. The equipment shall be identified by the mechanical equipment schedule tag numbers shown on the plans (ie. AC-1, REF-1, ACCU-1). Coordinate identification numbers with electrical contractor to ensure that the disconnect switches and other electrical/mec hanical equipment has consistent identification numbers.
B. Controls: Same as equipment above except 1/2" high letters.
2.2 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. Maximum spacing for identification shall be 10 feet.
B. Identification shall be provided per the following
1. At both sides of floor or wall penetrations
2. Adjacent to all valves and flanges
3. Adjacent to all changes in direction
4. To be visible from the point of normal approach
C. Provide plastic labels for mechanical engraving with predrilled holes for attachment hardware.
1. Material: rigid plastic laminated impact acrylic, 2-layer, exterior grade, UV stable.
2. Thickness: 3/16 inch minimum.
3. Maximum label size: Length and width vary for required label content but, no less than 2 inches wide by 1 inch high.
4. Background color:
5. Normal power: Black, matte finish.
6. Lettering: White, machine engraved, Futura font, 3/8 inch high, all caps.
7. Maximum temperature: Able to withstand up to 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
8. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless-steel screws, except contact type permanent adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate. a. Mounting screw type to be number 8 – 18 by ½ drilling or tapping style, ¼ inch hex washer head, stainless steel, or similar, appropriate for material in which sign is affixed to. A bead of silicone sealer shall be applied on back of sign and at screw locations prior to affixing sign to equipment.
b. For signs larger than 3 inches by 3 inches, use a minimum of 4 mounting screws.
2.3 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with the letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications but, not less than ¾ inch high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 – 2
B. Stencil paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray can form and grade.
C. Identification paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors.
2.4 PIPE IDENTIFICATION
A. General requirements for Manufactured Pipe labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B. Self-adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. Brady/Seton, Stranco, Rowmark or equal.
C. Small pipes: For external diameters less than 6 inches, provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around the pipe at each location, fastened by one of the follow ing methods:
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.
2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.
3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).
4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4 inch wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 inches.
5. Pipe label contents: Include identification of piping service using piping system nomenclature as specified, schedules or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application. Include pipe size and an arrow indicating direction of flow.
6. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
7. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
D. Locate pipe markers as follows:
1. Within one foot of each valve, fitting, thermometer or gauge.
2. At each branch or riser take off.
3. At each passage through walls or ceiling construction.
4. At each passage to underground.
5. On all horizontal pipe runs every 20 feet, at least twice in each room.
6. Identify piping contents, flow direction, supply and return.
7. At wall and ceiling access panels.
8. Practible variations or changes in locations and spacing may be made with specific approval of the University’s Representive to meet specific conditions.
A. Color code shall be as follows:
1. Refrigerant Piping - Yellow Background with Black Lettering B. Pipe Letter height shall be as follows:
Outside Pipe Diameter
Including Insulation
Minimum Length of Label Minimum Height of Letters
.75” – 1.25” 8” .5”
1.5” – 2” 8” .75”
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 – 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT AND CONTROL IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify all equipment with permanently attached plates.
B. Identify all controls and controllers in finished areas.
C. Identify all thermostats with an adhesive style label denoting the equipment served (RTU - 1, FC-1 and FC-2).
1. Label existing fan coil thermostat in existing first floor equipment room .
END OF SECTION 23 05 53
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SEE SECTION 23 05 00
A. Work Included: This Section describes balancing requirements for all phases of HVAC work.
The work includes complete balancing, adjusting and testing of the air and hydronic equipment and systems.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing and Balancing shall be performed in complete accordance with AABC National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation only by an AABC or NEBB licensed contractor.
B. Work shall be performed by an independent test and balance agency that specializes in, and whose business is limited to testing and balancing of air conditioning systems.
C. Instruments used for testing and balancing of systems shall have been calibrated within a period of six (6) months and shall be checked for accuracy prior to start of work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide to the Owner and Contractor with four (4) copies of a balancing agenda prior to start of balancing work including:
1. General description of each air system with its associate equipment and operational cycles for winter heating, reheat, humidification, and cooling. Where different cycles are used for day and night time operation, describe separately.
2. A complete list of all flow and terminal measurements to be performed.
3. Agenda shall also include specific procedures for determining test parameters for flow.
Specify type of instruments to be used, method of instrument application and air terminal correction factors for:
a. Air terminal configuration.
b. Flow direction (supply, return, or exhaust).
c. Effective area application to each size and type of air terminal. d. Density corrections.
4. Furnish a copy of agenda to the engineer and Owner prior to start of work, including qualifications of key personnel assigned to the project.
B. Provide a PDF of final report, containing information outlined in AABC and in Part 3 - EXECUTION.
1.04 NOTIFICATION AND SCHEDULING
A. A pre-balance conference shall be held prior to start as scheduled by the Contractor. Attendees at the meeting shall include representatives of the Balancing Contractor, General Contractor, Mechanical Sub-contractor, Control Sub-contractor, and Owner.
B. The schedule for testing and balancing the HVAC system shall be established in coordination with the Balancing Contractor on a critical path network.
C. The Balancing Contractor is responsible for initiating this continuing coordination to determine schedule for final testing and balancing services.
1.05 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES
A. To bring the HVAC system into a state of readiness for testing, adjusting and balancing, the Mechanical Contractor shall perform the following:
1. Ensure that all splitters, extractor, volume, smoke and fire dampers are properly located and functional. Dampers serving requirements of smoke, minimum and maximum o utside,
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 – 2
return, relief, and exhaust air shall provide tight closure and full opening, with a smooth and free operation.
2. Verify that all supply, return, exhaust, and grilles, registers, diffusers and terminal units are installed and operational.
3. Ensure that air handling or conditioning systems, units, and associated apparatus, such as heating and cooling coils, filter sections, access doors, etc., are blanked and/or sealed to eliminate excessive bypass or leakage of air. All fans and systems (supply, return , relief, and exhaust) are operating and free of vibration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 INSTRUMENT AND TOOLS
A. Furnish all instrumentation and tools required to perform a complete air and water balance of all systems on this project.
2.02 FLOW METERING SYSTEM
A. Use flow metering systems specified and/or furnished to perform air and water balance.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Coordinate required locations of duct test openings and damper locations specified in other sections.
B. Coordinate work done by testing and balancing agency with work of other trades.
C. Plan Check and Review:
1. Review location and type of volume dampers inlet conditions to air terminals, valves and HVAC equipment.
2. Review location, type and size of balancing valve, flow metering stations and automatic control valves in the water flow system.
3. Review location of pressure sensors in the air and water distribution systems.
4. Review automatic control systems as they affect the test and balance procedure.
5. Review sheet metal and piping shop drawings to verify the installation of flow control devices.
D. Job Site Inspections
1. Check for necessary balancing hardware (dampers, flow meters, valves, pressure taps, thermometer wells, etc.) to determine if they are installed properly and readily accessible.
2. Identify and report possible restrictions in systems (closed smoke/fire dampers, fire dampers, long runs of flexible duct, poorly installed duct fittings.
3. The mechanical contractor shall make any changes in pulley, sheaves; supply new pulleys, sheaves, belts as required. In addition, the Mechanical Contractor to add dampers, etc.
Necessary for correct balance at no additional cost to the Owner.
4. Check for necessary balancing hardware (dampers, flow meters, valves, pressure taps, thermometer wells, etc.) to determine if they are installed properly and readily accessible.
E. Identify and report possible restrictions in systems (closed smoke/fire dampers, fire dampers, long runs of flexible duct, poorly installed duct fittings.
3.02 TESTING
A. Testing equipment shall be furnished by the contractor; testing personnel shall be competent to conduct the tests.
B. Test all ductwork for excessive leakage and/or noise. Testing on any completed section of the ductwork must be made before installation of the finished ceiling or before the ductwork is furred
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 – 3
in inaccessible spaces. Any leaks found must be properly repaired or joints remade and the section retested until tight. Any leaks which cause an objectionable noise must be repaired, regardless of the amount of leakage.
C. Should any piece of an apparatus or any material or work fail in any of the tests, it shall be immediately removed and replaced by new material, and portion of the work replaced shall again be tested by Contractor at his own expense.
3.03 OPERATIONAL TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS
A. Upon completion of the work, all equipment and systems shall be operated and tested for a period of at least three consecutive days to demonstrate their satisfactory overall operation. On the last day of this period, the Contractors shall arrange for an acceptance test and final inspection by the Owner. All necessary adjustments and corrections to the systems shall be made prior to acceptance test so that the systems are operating smoothly and properly and absolutely ready before check and acceptance.
B. Coordination of all items associated with the mechanical systems is the responsibility of the mechanical contractor, including all wiring in connection with mechanical equipment, and all temperature control work. It shall be this contractor's responsibility to determine that his systems, equipment and apparatus are properly wired and controlled and completely ready for satisfactory operation and test.
C. Immediately before starting tests, all air filters shall be replaced as hereinbefore specified. All motors checked for rotation and all bearings lubricated.
D. Operating and safety controls shall be tested at least three times, under ambient design conditions.
3.04 AIR BALANCE
A. Changes, additions and modifications to dampers, pulleys and/or drive belts and other equipment necessary for proper air balance shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall retain the services of an independent certified test and balance agency to provide a complete air balance. All work shall be done by using instr uments certified accurate to limits used in standard practice for testing and balancing of air distribution for heating-cooling systems.
C. Study design specifications and engineering drawings and prepare schedule to physically inspect mechanical equipment for air distribution systems to be tested and balanced.
D. Prepare test and balancing schedule, test record forms and necessary technical information about the air distribution systems for installed heating-cooling equipment, and fan systems, for complete total air balance.
E. Recommend adjustments and/or corrections to mechanical equipment and air distribution systems that are necessary for proper balancing of air handling systems.
F. Upon completion of the air handling system, the Air Balance Agency shall complete t ests, analysis and balance of the air handling systems for heating-cooling equipment. The Air-Balance Agency then shall submit four copies of balance report to the Mechanical Contractor for forwarding to the Architect for evaluation and approval.
G. Air Balance Report shall include the following data
1. Design specifications of air handling equipment
a. CFM
b. Static Pressure
c. % of Outside Air
d. Fan Motor HP
e. Fan Motor BHP
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93 – 4
f. Fan RPM
2. Installed equipment data
a. Manufacturer
b. Identifying Data
3. Balancing test data
a. Fan Speed
b. Fan Operating amperes
c. Fan Operating BHP
d. Fan Duct sizes
e. Air Velocity (avg.)
f. Total CFM
g. Static Pressures
h. Design Specifications of grilles and/or diffusers
i. Manufacturer No. and Data
j. FPM
k. CFM
4. Installed equipment data
a. Manufacturer No. and Data
b. Location
5. Balancing test data
a. FPM
b. CFM
H. All outlets shall be set for the air pattern shown on plans.
I. Supply and return air dampers shall be set for design CFM, on heating and cooling cycle.
J. Test and balance shall correct for air density at 6000 ft. elevation and above.
3.05 OWNERS INSTRUCTION
A. Review the installation of all equipment and controls with the Owner after all systems are operating automatically. Instruct the Owner in the adjustment of all control and equipment devices. Allow a minimum of 8 hours for this instruction.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and DIVISION 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work in this section.
B. See 23 05 00
1.02 SECTIONS INCLUDE
A. This Section describes insulation materials, methods, and applications for HVAC Mechanical Work, Special or specific details, applications, features, or methods may be described in work descriptions Sections or on the drawings.
1.03 RELATED DIVISIONS
A. 01 00 00: General Requirements
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Thermal insulation materials shall meet the property requirements of one or more of the following specifications as applicable to the specific product or end use:
1. American Society for Testing of Materials Specifications:
a. ASTM C 547, "Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation" b. ASTM C 585, "Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)" c. ASTM C 1136, "Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeanace Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation"
1.05 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Insulation materials furnished should meet the minimum thickness requirements of National Voluntary Consensus Standard 90.1 (Latest edition), "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings," of the American Society of Heating, Refrigeration, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE).
B. Insulation materials furnished and installed hereunder shall meet the fire hazard requirements of applicable building codes when tested in composite form per one of the following nominally equivalent test methods:
1. American Society for Testing of Materials ASTM E 84
2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. UL 723, CAN/ULC-S102-M88
3. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 255
C. Molded pipe insulation shall be manufactured to meet ASTM C 585 for sizes required in the particular system.
D. Molded fibrous glass pipe insulation shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C 547.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installers: only a licensed firm employing installers specifically skilled and experienced in applying insulation to piping shall do Insulation work.
B. Insulation materials and accessories furnished and installed hereunder shall, where required, be accompanied by manufacturers' current submittal or data sheets showing compliance with applicable specifications listed in above.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 – 2
C. Insulation materials, including all weather and vapor barrier materials, closures, hangers, supports, fitting covers, and other accessories, shall be furnished and installed in strict accordance with project drawings, plans, and specifications.
D. Insulation materials and accessories shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by skilled and experienced workers who are regularly engaged in commercial insulation work.
E. Codes and Standards:
1. California Code of Regulations - Title 24.
2. National Fire Protection Association - 90A.
1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
A. All of the insulation materials and accessories covered by this specification shall be delivered to the job site and stored in a safe, dry place with appropriate labels and/or other product identification.
B. The contractor shall use whatever means are necessary to protect the insulation materials and accessories before, during, and after installation. No insulation material shall be installed that has become damaged in any way.
C. If any insulation material has become wet because of transit or job site exposure to moisture or water, the contractor shall not install such material, and shall remove it from the job site. An exception may be allowed in cases where the contractor is able to demonstrate that wet insulation when fully dried out (either before installation or afterward following exposure to system operating temperatures) will provide installed performance that is equiv alent in all respects to new, completely dry insulation. In such cases, consult the insulation manufacturer for technical assistance.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT INSULATION – SEE 23 07 13
2.02 HVAC PIPING INSULATION – SEE 23 07 19
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATION / INSTALLATION
A. Use the types and thickness of insulation specified in work description Sections.
B. Apply insulations in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with instructions specified herein or noted on the drawings.
C. Install insulations only after the systems, items, and equipment have been installed and tested, inspected, and accepted. Exceptions: Slip-on piping insulation and equipment insulations installed at the factory.
D. Fit insulation snugly to the item being insulated; butt all joints tightly with no v oids, spaces, or thin spots.
E. Seal all joints completely; where sealing tape is used, center the tape over the joint.
F. Except where specified or necessary, do not use staples or fasteners which penetrate vapor barrier jackets or covers on cold systems or equipment; where such penetrating fasteners are used, seal each penetration completely to maintain the vapor barrier integrity. All penetrations of the ASJ and exposed ends of insulation shall be sealed with vapor barrier mastic. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section joint and at each fitting to provide isolation of water incursion.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 – 3
G. Use adhesives, mastics, cements, sealants, and finishes undiluted unless specifically directed otherwise; apply per manufacturer's directions.
H. Install outdoor jacketing or other specified weather proofing or finishing on all insulations outdoors.
I. Install all indoor exposed insulation with extra care and finish neatly.
J. Follow specified methods of installation unless alternative methods are subm itted and approved.
3.02 FINISHING
A. Finishes and Protection:
1. Insure that the exterior finish of all insulation is applied and complete as specified
2. Make ready for painting, or painted to match existing including color where specified for paint.
3. Install all metal jackets or protective sheathing where specified.
B. Repair, Touchup: Properly repair and touchup all dents, rips, tears, or other damage inflicted on jackets or exterior surfaces of insulation. Breaks or punctures in the vapor barrier of external insulation will not be accepted and must be repaired prior to project acceptance.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. See Section 23 07 00
B. A continuous, intact vapor barrier is critical for ducts.
C. All insulation material shall have a mold, humidity, and erosion resistant face that has met the requirements of CMC Table 1701.
D. Insulation applied to the exterior surface of ducts located in buildings shall have a flame spread of no more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 50.
E. Insulate all above grade ductwork unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified in Section 23 31 16 METAL DUCT.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ID-1 FLEXIBLE BLANKET/VAPOR BARRIER FACED:
A. Glass fiber reinforced Kraft/aluminum foil faced flexible blanket of 0.75 PCF nominal density resin bonded fibrous glass, have a installed thermal conductivity k factor of 0.25 at 75 F.; suitable for direct application and service on cold and dual temperature ductwork.
B. Supply FSK jacket with a permeance of 0.02 or less
C. Fiberglass insulation with all service facing, Certainteed Type 75 with Type IV facing, Johns Manville Microlite with FSK facing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS – COMPARE TO TABLE ON M001 AND NOTIFY ENGINEER OF ANY
DISCREPENCIES
A. Supply and Return Air Ducts indoors/concealed
1. Use System ID-1 (Flexible Blanket / Vapor Barrier Faced a. 1-1/2” thickness for all sizes; installed R-value = 4.2 minimum b. Applies to all cross sections (I.E. rectangular, circular, etc.) c. Compare to table on sheet M001 and notify engineer of any discrepancies
B. Do not externally insulate the following unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified:
1. Lined ductwork (indoors).
2. Ducts constructed of fibrous glass (flexible or rigid).
3. Above grade ducts conducting exhaust air or ventilating air (not heated or cooled and used for fresh air supply) unless otherwise noted.
4. Exposed ducts located in conditioned space.
3.02 INSTALLATION FLEXIBLE BLANKET/VAPOR BARRIER FACED
A. Install on supply and return ductwork so that condensation will not occur.
B. Wrap around ducts, butt all joints. Secure with 3” (minimum) width tape at 18" (maximum) intervals along the duct; tape may be of the same material as the insulation facing with a pressure sensitive adhesive on one side or may be Hardcast DT490-C mineral impregnated woven synthetic fiber using Hardcast FTA-20 roller. In addition, on rectangular and cross section ducts, secure to the flat bottoms more than 18" wide with SticKlip fasteners only with 1 ½" diameter washers at 16" centers both ways; one centered longitudinal row is sufficient for ducts up to 36" flat bottom width.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13 – 2
C. Seal all seams and joints with 3" (minimum) width tape centered along the edge of the la p;tape shall be as specified above.
D. Seal all fastener penetrations with 3" x 3" (minimum) tape centered over the washer; tape shall be as specified above.
E. Where strap type duct supports penetrate the insulation, slit the insulation and facing, fit around the straps, and seal with tape as specified above; tape shall be of size to suit the situation and be applied in the number of layers necessary to obtain complete sealing.
F. Insulate all flexible duct connectors to the same thickness as adjacent duct insulati on.
G. Continue insulation on terminal unit inlets to cover the entire inlet collar.
H. Insulate over all duct access doors with the same thickness as adjacent duct insulation. Provide removable insulation piece with an outer label on the insulation identifying the type of door.
I. All ductwork shall be wrapped with 1" rigid insulation board and two layers of 5/8" gypsum board taped and sealed as detailed on the drawings from supply and return fans for all air conditioning units.
3.03 INSTALLATION: FLEXIBLE BLANKET/COATED LINER:
A. Apply a 1/16" thick coat of Foster 85-62 JacTac 3-M Company Scotch Grip #38, Childers-125-1, adhesive or duct butter on all end or edges of cuts, rips, etc., before or while installing.
B. Secure to the ductwork with welded or SticKlip, fasteners with 1 ½" diameter washers with cupped or beveled heads. Set at 16 (maximum) on centers both ways; provide a row of pins within 1" of all edges and joints, and one row of pins (minimum) on each flat duct or plenum face. In addition secure the entire perimeter of all edges at seams or joints with a 4" minimum width application of the above specified adhesive. The upstream edge of all duct liner shall have a sheet metal closure to protect against erosion.
C. Fasteners shall compress the liner no more than 1/8”.
D. Clip off protruding ends of fastener pins in plenums.
E. In walk-in plenums, finish the interior face of liner with two (2) coats of Foster 30-36 Sealfas or Childers CP-50AMV1 lagging adhesive. All seams in insulation shall be sealed with fiberglas s mesh embedded between coats of lagging adhesive.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.02 SEE SECTION 23 07 00.
A. A continuous, intact vapor barrier is critical for all pipes conveying fluids at temperatures less than 75o F.
B. All insulation material shall have a mold, humidity, and erosion resistant face that has met the requirements of CMC Table 1701.
C. Insulation applied to the exterior surface of pipes located in buildings shall have a flame spread of no more than 25 and a smoke developed rating of not more than 50.
D. All requirements of Section 23 07 00 apply to this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 IP-3 ELASTOMERIC FOAM
A. Insulation shall be Elastomeric Foam Insulation. Insulation should have a maximum service temperature of 210o F, a minimum service temperature of –40 degrees F., and a "K" factor of .28 at 75 degrees F. The flame spread of the insulation shall be 25 or less, and smoke density shall be 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
B. Provide U.V. protective coating for all outdoor applications similar to Fosters 30-64 coating.
C. Rubatex R-180-FS/R-1800-FS, Armstrong Armaflex or equal PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PIPING APPLICATIONS
NOTE: Where multiple systems are listed, contractor has the option to choose.
A. Refrigerant (RS) – Suction piping above grade/indoors
1. Use System IP-3 (Elastomeric Foam)
a. 3/4" thickness for all sizes
B. Refrigerant (RS) – Suction piping above grade/outdoors
1. Use System IP-3 (Elastomeric Foam)
a. 3/4" thickness with U.V. protection for all sizes
C. Refrigerant (HG) – Hot gas piping above grade/indoors
1. Use System IP-3 (Elastomeric Foam)
a. 3/4" thickness for all sizes
D. Refrigerant (HG) – Hot gas piping above grade/outdoors
1. Use System IP-3 (Elastomeric Foam)
a. 3/4" thickness with U.V. protection for all sizes
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Unless specifically excluded herein or on the drawings, insulate all parts of hot and chilled water piping systems, steam piping, and condensate drains including fittings, flanges, valves, and pipe-mounted devices, except do not cover nameplates on devices.
B. Install insulation in removable sections over unions, flanges, and line components or devices requiring periodic maintenance.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19 – 2
C. Install insulation butted tightly to transitions such as insulated pipe shields, insulated pipe sleeves, equipment connections, etc.
D. Install insulation on all chilled water piping systems so that condensation will not occur. Insulate all chilled water pipe supports where hanger is directly in contact with pipe up to the point of connection to the building structure. All piping shall be supported in such a manner that neither the insulation nor the vapor/weather barrier is compromised by the hanger or the effects of the hanger. In all cases, hanger spacing shall be such that the circumferential joint may be made outside the hanger. On cold systems, vapor barrier shall be continuous, including material covered by the hanger saddle.
E. Treat equipment face piping as follows:
1. Where piping is subject to condensation (refrigerant liquid lines) and where installed above grade outdoors (either hot or cold systems) insulate piping completely to the point of equipment connection.
2. Where not subject to condensation (refrigerant vapor liens) terminate insulation at the outlet side of the equipment shut-off valve, leaving the face piping un-insulated, 24” max, unless noted otherwise, except where exposed to outdoors.
F. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other. Butt insulation joints firmly to ensure complete, tight fit over all piping surfaces.
G. Maintain the integrity of factory-applied vapor barrier jacketing on all pipe insulation, protecting it against puncture, tears or other damage. All staples used on cold pipe insulation shall be coated with suitable sealant to maintain vapor barrier integrity.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 1
SECTION 23 09 23 - DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS.
A. All work of this Division shall be coordinated and provided by the single Building Management System (BMS) Contractor.
B. The work of this Division shall be scheduled, coordinated, and interfaced with the associated work of other trades. Reference the Division 23 Sections for details.
C. The work of this Division shall be as required by the Specification s, Point Schedules and Drawings.
D. If the BMS Contractor believes there are conflicts or missing information in the project documents, the Contractor shall promptly request clarification and instruction from the design team.
1.2 DEFINITIONS.
A. Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a defined range of limiting values.
B. Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete signal level and an “OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level.
C. Building Management System (BMS): The total integrated system of fully operational and functional elements, including equipment, software, programming, and associated materials, to be provided by this Division BMS Contractor and to be interfaced to the associated work of other related trades.
D. BMS Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Division. This Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer, installer, commissioner and ongoing service provider for the BMS work.
E. Control Sequence: A BMS pre -programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control objectives.
F. Direct Digital Control: The digital algori thms and pre-defined arrangements included in the BMS software to provide direct closed -loop control for the designated equipment and controlled variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing considerations and the like.
G. BMS Network: The total digital on -line real -time interconnected configuration of BMS digital processing units, workstations, panels, sub- panels, controllers, devices and associated elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more fully interfaced and integrated sub-networks, LAN, WAN or the like.
H. Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the BMS network.
I. BMS Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing of all BMS work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and ordinances so as to provide a single coherent BMS as required by this Division.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 2
J. Provide: The term “Provide” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean to furnish, install in place, connect, calibrate, test, commission, warrant, document and supply the associated required services ready for operation.
K. PC: Personal Computer from a recognized major manufacturer L. Furnish: The term “Furnish ” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean supply at the BMS Contractor’s cost to the designated third party trade contractor for installation. BMS Contractor shall connect furnished items to the BMS, calibrate, test, commission, warrant a nd document.
M. Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the BMS wiring and terminations.
N. Install: The term “Install” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean receive at the jobsite and mount.
O. Protocol: The term “protocol” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean a defined set of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange of data between BMS network nodes.
P. Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all of programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the BMS industry for real- time, on-line, integrated BMS configurations.
Q. The use of words in the singular in these Division documents shall not be considered as limiting when other indications in these documents denote that more than one such item is being referenced.
R. Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other symbolic interpretation aids included in the Division documents are for general information only and are to assist in the reading and interpretation of these Documents.
S. The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division:
1. ADC Analog to Digital Converter
2. AHJ Authority Having Jurisdiction
3. AI Analog Input
4. AN Application Node
5. ANSI American National Standards Institute
6. AO Analog Output
7. ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange
8. ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
9. AWG American Wire Gauge
10. BTL BACnet Testing Laboratories
11. CPU Central Processing Unit
12. CRT Cathode Ray Tube
13. DAC Digital to Analog Converter
14. DDC Direct Digital Control
15. BI Digital Input
16. BO Digital Output
17. EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
18. EMI Electromagnetic Interference
19. FAS Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System
20. GUI Graphical User Interface
21. HOA Hand–Off–Auto
22. ID Identification
23. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 3
24. I/O Input/Output
25. IT Information Technology
26. LAN Local Area Network
27. LCD Liquid Crystal Display
28. LED Light Emitting Diode
29. MCC Motor Control Center
30. NC Normally Closed
31. NIC Not In Contract
32. NO Normally Open
33. OWS Operator Workstation
34. OAT Outdoor Air Temperature
35. PAI Pseudo Analog Input
36. PAO Pseudo Analog Output
37. PDI Pseudo Digital Input
38. PDO Pseudo Digital Output
39. PC Personal Computer
40. RAM Random Access Memory
41. RF– Radio Frequency
42. RFI Radio Frequency Interference
43. RH– Relative Humidity
44. ROM– Read Only Memory
45. RTD– Resistance Temperature Device
46. SPDT– Single Pole Double Throw
47. SPST– Single Pole Single Throw
48. XVGA– Extended Video Graphics Adapter
49. TBA– To Be Advised
50. TCP/IP– Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
51. TTD– Thermistor Temperature Device
52. UPS– Uninterruptible Power Supply
53. VAC– Volts, Alternating Current
54. VAV– Variable Air Volume
55. VDC– Volts, Direct Current
56. WAN– Wide Area Network
T. BMS Description.
1. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be a complete system designed for scalable implementation from small use to large, networked systems. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Devices residing on the automation network located in equipment rooms and similar shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the owner’s IT staff to ensure that the BMS will perform in the owner’s environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN.
2. The scope of work includes but is not limited to the following:
a. Complete new digital control system for the new building areas and retrofitted central utility plant (CUP).
b. Complete digital control system retrofit of all existing building areas to remain. See existing control drawings at the end of this specification for reference, 1) Provide new motor actuators for all existing terminal air units (TAU) to remain. 2) Provide new motor actuators for all existing TAU reheat control valves to remain.
3) Alternate Bid modifications of existing air handling units. 4) New Communication Bus throughout.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 4
5) New control power as required.
6) Existing local devices and sensors (excluding space level sensors) and associated wiring may be reused if compatible with th e new control system and in good operating condition. All existing to remain devices shall be included in the standard material and labor warranty period. c. The City of Sacramento Campus FX Server shall be updated to include all Convention Center systems.
d. Coordinate and obtain data from the City of Sacramento Niagara 4 control systems.
3. Any and all components of the BMS that are connected via field bus or IP network, including the BMS server, supervisory controllers, equipment controllers, user interface software, system and controller programming tools and software applications shall be designed, engineered, and tested to work together as a complete building managemen t system.
4. BMS system architecture shall support integration of third party devices using industry accepted protocols such as BACnet, LonWorks, and MODBUS.
5. All points of operator user interface shall be on standard PCs, laptops, or mobile computing platforms such as tablets and smart phones that do not require the purchase of any special software from the BMS manufacturer. The primary point of interface on these devices will be a standard web browser.
6. User interfaces for Windows workstation, tablet a nd smart phone shall be provided. Each platform user interface shall use controls and screen resolutions that are in conformance with accepted design for that specific platform.
7. Middleware HTML5 web-based Graphics User Interface (GUI) as well as the Single Pain of Glass (SPoG) deployment philosophy which shall be to unify the display of multiple subsystems to present a single operational view of data in a way that's easier to interpret and manage.
8. Where necessary and as dictated elsewhere in these Specifications, BMS servers shall be used for the purpose of providing a location for extensive archiving of historical point and alarm and operator transactions.
U. The work of the single BMS Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in al l Sections of this Division specification together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents.
V. The BMS work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipme nt, software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses , transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties, services, and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned in these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned BMS.
W. The BMS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features, functions and services:
1. Operator information, alarm management and control functions.
2. Enterprise-level information and control access.
3. Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval, and reporting functions.
4. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of BMS functions.
5. Offsite monitoring and management access.
6. Energy management.
7. Standard applications for terminal HVAC systems.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 5
X. Quality Assurance.
1. General:
a. The Building Management System Contractor shall be a controls contractor who meets one of the following criteria:
1) Is factory trained and authorized by the BMS manufacturer to sell, service and support the Building Management System specified herein. 2) Purchases thru an authorized BMS distributor of the manufacturer and has been properly trained as an "Authorized Systems" contractor or ins taller thru a qualified program supported and endorsed by the BMS manufacturer. Proof of such shall be submitted prior to the award of any contract or notice to proceed.
b. BMS Contractors whether having a direct or indirect authorized relationship with the BMS manufacturer shall provide documentation that this relationship is current and in good standing with the BMS manufacturer prior to any contracts being awarded.
The BMS Contractor shall also provide the name and contact information of the manufacturer's individual responsible for managing the distribution of their BMS products, for the owner and/or engineer's benefit.
c. In order to protect the rights of the owner for future service, repairs, &/or additional work, the BMS Contractor shall submit a lette r from the BMS manufacturer stating that they are not the "exclusive" representative of this manufacturer. The owner does not intend to be "locked in" to one representative. In order to provide the owner with the choice of who they do business with for work and/or services on this system after the scope of work detailed in this specification has been completed, any BMS manufacturer that provides "exclusive" geographic agreements with only one (1) BMS Contractor or rep in this area, shall not be an acceptable. d. The owner requires that there is at least 5 BMS Contractors servicing this geography that meet the above criteria for the BMS Manufacturer in order for the manufacturer to be accepted.
e. The BMS Contractor shall have a facility within a 100 -mile radius of the job site supplying complete maintenance and support services on a 24 hour, 7 -day-a-week basis. The BMS Contractor shall have at this facility factory trained, directly employed and full time technical staff, spare parts inventory, and all nec essary test and diagnostic equipment.
f. As evidence and assurance of the BMS Contractor's ability to support the owner's system with service and parts, the BMS Contractor must have been in the BMS business for at least the last five (5) years and have successfully completed at least 3 projects of comparable value of this contract in the preceding five years. g. The Building Management System architecture shall consist of the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of Building Management Systems, and shall be the manufacturer's latest standard of design at the time of bid. h. The BMS Contractor shall provide Johnson ABCS certificate as part of bid response package. Contractor to provide resumes of 5 technicians, each with a minimum of 5 years of experience, certified to install, program and service the provided system.
i. The BMS contractor shall demonstrate live connection to and navigation of 2 sites using both a standard desktop and tablet computers.
2. Workplace Safety and Hazardous Materials:
a. Provide a safety program in compliance with the Contract Documents. b. The BMS Contractor shall have a corporately certified comprehensive Safety Certification Manual and a designated Safety Supervisor for the Project. c. The BMS Contractor and its employees and subtrades shall comply with federal, state and local safety regulations.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 6
d. The BMS Contractor shall ensure that all subcontractors and employees have written safety programs in place that covers their scope of work, and that their employees receive the training required by the OSHA rules that have jurisdiction for at least each topic listed in the Safety Certification Manual. e. Hazards created by the BMS Contractor or its subcontractors shall be eliminated before any further work proceeds.
f. Hazards observed but not created by the BMS Contractor or its subcontractors shall be reported to either the General Contractor or the Owner within the same day. The Contractor shall be required to avoid the hazard area until the hazard has been eliminated.
g. The BMS Contractor shall sign and date a safety certification form prior to any work being performed, stating that the Contractors’ company is in full compliance with the Project safety requirements.
h. The BMS Contractor’s safety program shall include written policy and arrangements for the handling, storage and management of all hazardous materials to be used in the work in compliance with the requirements of the AHJ at the Project site. i. The BMS Contractor’s employees and subcontractor’s staff shall have received training as applicable in the use of hazardous materials and shall govern their actions accordingly.
3. Quality Management Program.
a. Designate a competent and experienced employee to provide BMS Project Management. The designated Project Manager shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the BMS Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager shall:
1) Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials, labor and other resources are available as needed.
2) Manage the financial aspects of the BMS Contract.
3) Coordinate as necessary with other trades.
4) Be responsible for the work and actions of the BMS workforce on site.
4. References.
a. All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:
1) National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code. 2) Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels.
3) UL 916 Energy Management
4) NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
5) NFPA 90A - Standard For The Installation Of Air Conditioning And Ventilating Systems.
6) American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
7) National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA). 8) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
9) American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) [user note: add ASHRAE 62 IAQ as applicable].
10) Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA).
11) Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). 12) American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII). 13) Electronics Industries Association (EIA).
14) Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 15) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
16) Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices.
17) Americans Disability Act (ADA).
18) ANSI/EIA 909.1-A-1999 (LonWorks).
19) ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135 (BACnet).
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 7
b. In the case of conflicts or discrepancies, the more stringent regulation shall apply. c. All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project site.
5. Submittals.
a. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples:
1) The BMS Contractor shall submit a list of all shop drawings with submittals dates within 30 days of contract award.
2) Submittals shall be in defined packages. Each package shall be complete and shall only reference itself and previously submitted packages. The packages shall be as approved by the Architect and Engineer for Contract compliance. 3) Allow 15 working days for the review of each package by the Architect and Engineer in the scheduling of the total BMS work.
4) Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations and be approved. Filing shall be at the expense of the BMS Contractor where filing is necessary. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner.
5) Prepare an index of all submittals and shop drawings for the installation. Index shall include a shop drawing identification number, Contract Documents reference and item description.
6) The BMS Contractor shall correct any errors or omissions noted in the first review.
7) At a minimum, submit the following:
8) BMS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and interconnections. 9) Systems schematics, sequences, and flow diagrams.
10) Device schedule listing each BMS server, supervisory controller, equipment controller and any other networked devices in the BMS, including: device name, device type, network identifier, and device identifier (address). 11) Points schedule listing each point in each of the networked devic es listed in the device schedule, including: point name, point type, point description, and point identifier (address).
12) Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus. 13) Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying quantities, part numbers, descriptions, and optional features. 14) Control Damper Schedule including a separate line for each damper provided under this section and a column for each of the damper attributes, including:
Code Number, Fail Position, Damper Type , Damper Operator, Duct Size, Damper Size, Mounting, and Actuator Type.
15) Room Schedule including a separate line for each VAV box and/or terminal unit indicating location and address.
16) Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided under this section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number, Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size, Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV, Design Pressure, and Actuator Type.
17) Details of all BMS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades. 18) Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number, photo and description for all products including software.
6. Record Documentation.
a. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1) Three (3) copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be furnished on DVD media, and include the following for the BMS provided:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 8
a) Table of contents.
b) As-built system record drawings. Drawings shall represent the as -built condition of the system and incorporate all information supplied with the approved submittal.
c) Manufacturer’s product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including software.
d) System Operator’s manuals.
e) Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences. f) BMS network diagrams.
g) Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades. 2) The Operation and Maintenance Manual DVD shall be self -contained, and include all necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets. Viewer software shall provide the abilit y to display, zoom, and search all documents.
b. On-Line documentation: After completion of all tests and adjustments the Contractor shall provide a copy of all as -built information and product data to be installed on a customer designated computer workstation or server.
7. Warranty.
a. Standard Material and Labor Warranty:
1) Provide a one-year labor and material warranty on the BMS. 2) If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written notice from the owner, it is found to be defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it shall be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the option of the BMS Contractor at no expense to the Owner. 3) Maintenance of computer Software Programs: The BMS Contractor shall maintain all software during the standard f irst year warranty period. In addition, all factory or sub -vendor upgrades to software during the first year warranty period shall be added to the systems, when they become available, at no additional cost. In addition to first year standard warranty, soft ware provided by BMS Contractor shall come with a 5 Year Software Maintenance license. All SNC and BAS Servers are included in this coverage. Labor to implement upgrades in years two through five are not included in standard warranty.
4) The Owner shall grant to BMS Contractor reasonable access to the BMS during the warranty period. Remote access to the BMS (for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the warranty period) will be allowed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
A. The BMS shall be a complete system designed for scalable implementation from small stand-alone use to large, networked systems. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms.
Devices residing on the enterprise IT network shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the owner's IT staff to ensure that the BAS will perform in the owner's environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN.
1. The Building Management System shall consist of the following:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 9
a. Programmable equipment controllers, for directly operating and controlling mechanical equipment.
b. Network thermostats, for directly operating and controlling mechanical equipment. c. Field bus network, for exchanging data between equipment controllers and between equipment controllers and supervisory controllers.
d. Supervisory controller(s), for managing networks of equipment controllers and providing supervisory control services.
e. Automation network, for exchanging data between supervisory controllers, distributed user interface(s), and BMS server.
f. Distributed user interface(s), for providing operational access to the BMS. g. BMS server (optional), for managing networks of supervisory controllers, equipment controllers and providing additional supervisory control services. h. Application software, for defining the sequence of operation of the BMS. i. Other components required for a complete and working BMS, including network processing, data storage and communications equipment.
2. The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices, while re-using existing controls equipment.
3. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single devi ce for alarm reporting and control execution.
a. The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. b. The System shall maintain all settings and overrides through a system reboot. c. The System shall comply with the following International Code Council (ICC) Codes:
1) Building Officials and code Administrators International (BOMA) model code. 2) International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) model code. 3) Southern Building Code Congress International (SBCCI) regulations.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Johnson Controls, Inc., Facility Explorer.
2.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
A. First Tier Network – FX80 Master Controller
1. The first tier network shall involve connecting FX80 Master Controller into the existing campus wide secure TCP/IP Intranet.
2. Second tier network (BACnet MSTP) shall connect into new FX80 Master Controller.
3. Daisy chain the (BACnet MSTP) network to each new FX-PC Controllers.
2.3 OPERATOR INTERFACE – FX80 SOFTWARE PLATFORM
A. The Contractor shall Provide and install new Java Independent FX80 Software.
B. The FX80 Software provides command entry, information management, network alarm management, and database management functions. Al l real -time control functions, including scheduling, history collection and alarming, shall be resident in the FX-PC controller.
C. The ABCS Contractor shall provide new real -time graphic screens at the workstation as per the district standard. All screens sh all have transfer buttons to penetrate to all other screens. At a minimum, the following screens with all associated control and monitoring points shall be programmed:
1. Building plan
2. Major systems showing all as built equipment and air and water paths
3. Floor plans clearly depicting all zone boundaries and zone temperatures
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 10
4. Graphics for all specified HVAC Systems.
a. The Contractor shall provide text mode screens depicting all control and monitoring points. The screens shall group points into logical systems and subsystems. The operator shall be able to switch between text mode and graphic mode viewing of the facility.
b. The Contractor shall install all controller configuration software tools on the workstation. The operator shall have the capab ility of programming, downloading and commissioning any controller from the “XXX” Workstation using these tools without any additional hardware or software. All current controller databases shall be maintained at the district workstation.
5. Alarms
a. Each FX80 Master Controller shall receive and process alarms sent to it by the FX- PC control system. The alarm management portion of the FX software shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions:
1) Log date and time of alarm occurrence.
2) Generate a “Pop-Up” window informing an operator that an alarm has been received.
3) Allow an operator, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, delete, or disable an alarm.
4) Provide an audit trail for alarms by recording operator acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the operator, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time/date stamp. 5) Record all alarms received to the dedicated FX -Server Alarm Server hard drive.
6) Allow the operators to view/manage the alarm data archived to hard disk.
Selection of a single menu item or tool bar button shall allow the user to acknowledge, disable, delete, or print the selected alarm. 7) Alarms shall be generated by the FX80 Software for any controller that is “Off- Line” an d is not communicating, or that does not have an active control program loaded.
6. Password
a. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit workstation control, display, and database manipulation capabilities as he or she deems appropriate for each user, based on an assigned password.
b. Levels of access shall be supported as follows:
1) Data Access and Display
2) Operator Overrides
3) Database Modification
4) Database Generation
5) All privileges, including Password Add/Modify
c. A minimum of 20 unique passwords, including user initials, shall be supported.
7. Historical trending and data collection
a. Each FX80 Controller shall store trend and point history data for all analog and digital inputs and outputs, as follows: Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending. Three methods of collection shall be allowed: Defined time interval.
Upon a change of value. Whenever a value is out of range. b. Trend and change of value data shall be stored within the controller.
2.4 NETWORK CONTROLLERS – FX80 MASTER CONTROLLER
A. First Tier – Master Controller with FX80 Graphical UI Software
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 11
1. The Network Controller shall be a fully user -programmable, supervisory controller. The Network Controller shall monitor the netwo rk of distributed FX -PC controllers, provide global strategy and direction, and communicate on a peer-to-peer basis with other Network Controllers.
2. First Tier Network – The Network Controller shall reside on the existing campus wide Ethernet Network. Each Network Controller shall support a sub -network of BACnet controllers on the second tier network.
2.5 BACNET PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS
A. Second Tier – BACnet Controllers (FX-PC Series Field Controllers)
1. Controllers shall support custom algorithms to enable full standalone control of VAV boxes as specified.
2. Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs to perform the specified control sequences in a totally standalone fashion, and allow spare points for future expansion.
3. Controllers shall have a library of control routines and program logic to perform the sequence of operation as specified in the Execution portion of this specification and as shown on plans.
4. The room sensor shall have a pushbutton over-ride of the set back schedule. Connect each controller to a local room thermostat.
5. Alarm Management: Each Controller shall perform its own limit and status monitoring and analysis to maximize performance.
2.6 INPUT DEVICES ROOM THERMOSTATS, DP SENSORS, RELAYS, ETC.
A. General Requirements
1. Installation, testing, and calibration of all sensors, transmitters, and other input devices shall be provided to meet the system requirements.
B. Sensors
1. General Requirements:
a. Sensors and transmitters shall be provided, as outlined in the input/output summary and sequence of operations.
2. Room Temperature Sensor – MS-BTB7003-0
a. Room sensors shall be constructed for either surface or wall box mounting. b. Room sensors shall have the following options when specified:
1) Setpoint adjustment providing a +3 degree (adjustable) range. 2) Provide custom labels on each thermostat indicating the maximum and minimum heat / cool set points.
3) A momentary override request push button for activation of after- hours operation.
4) Digital Display of the room temperature and setpoint.
3. Infrared Space Temperature Transmitter shall contain a non-contact infrared room radiant- temperature transmitter to measure room temperature in the range of 30°F to 90°F, unless indicated otherwise. The assembly shall be ceiling mounted by all -thread rods from structure. The output shall be a compatible with the panel it serves.
4. CO2 Sensor
a. Provide a FX Compatible CO2 Sensor, 0-2000 PPM, 32 to 122 F operating environment, 0-95 % RH and accurate within 3% of reading.
5. Humidity Sensor
a. Provide a FX Compatible Room Humidity Sensor, +/- 20% accuracy over 10 to 90% RH range, 0-5/10VDC output, <0.5% RH per year long term drift.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 12
6. Outside Air Sensors
a. Outside air sensors shall be designed to withstand the environmental conditions to which they will be exposed. They shall also be provided with a solar shield. b. Sensors exposed to wind velocity pressures shall be shielded by a perforated plate that surrounds the sensor element.
c. Temperature transmitters shall be of NEMA 3R construction and rated for ambient temperatures.
d. CO2 sensors shall have 0 -2000 ppm output scaling, with +/ - 40 ppm accuracy, replicable non-dispersive NDIR CO2 element.
e. Humidity sensor shall have 0-100% output, with +/- 2% accuracy over 10 to 90% RH range, 4-20 mA output, sintered stainless steel media filter.
7. Duct Mount Sensors
a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct, and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement. b. Duct sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly, including lock nut and mounting plate.
c. For outdoor air duct applications, a weatherproof mounting box with weatherproof cover and gasket shall be used.
8. Averaging Sensors
a. For ductwork greater in any dimension that 48 inches and/or where air temperature stratification exists, an averaging sensor with multiple sensing points shall be used. b. For plenum applications, such as mixed air temperature measurements, a string of sensors mounted across the plenum shall be used to account for stratification and/or air turbulence. The averaging string shall have a minimum of 4 sensing points per 12-foot long segment.
C. Differential Pressure Transmitters
1. General Air and Water Pressure Transmitter Requirements:
2. Pressure transmitters shall be constructed to withstand 100% pressure over-range without damage, and to hold calibrated accuracy when subject to a momentary 40% over -range input.
3. Pressure transmitters shall transmit a 0 to 5 VDC, 0 to 10 VDC, or 4 to 20 mA output signal.
4. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow sensing device, and shall be supplied with Tee fittings and shut- off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines to allow the balancing Contractor and Owner permanent, easy - to-use connection.
5. Differential Pressure Sensor/Transmitter: Provide a high quality, accurate differential pressure sensor/transmitter for measuring the pressure drop across the chiller(s) systems shown on the drawings. Design range shall be as required by system. The sensor shall feature push button zero and span adjustments. Minimum accuracy shall be 0.055% of calibrated span including combined effects of linearity, hysteresis and repeatability.
Stability shall be 0.125% of upper range limit for minimum of five years. No internal mechanical linkages shall be used in the transmitter(s). Sensor/transmitter shall be Rosemount 3051S or approved equal
D. Pressure Sensor/Transmitter: Sensor span shall be not less than 150 percent and not more than 300 percent of the working pressure. Accuracy shall be 0.5 percent of calibrated span. Static pressure and differential pressure analog sensors shall be diaphragm type with solid state pre- amplifier. Transmitter shall produce a linear 4 to 20 ma or 0 to 10 V dc output corresponding to the sensed pressure measurement. Transmitter shall have offset and span adjustments. Unless otherwise noted or shown, locate static pressure sensors for variable air volume air handling units 2/3 of the duct distance downstream of the supply fan
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 13
E. Status and Safety Switches
1. General Requirements
a. Switches shall be provided to monitor equipment status, safety conditions, and generate alarms at the FMS when a failure or abnormal condition occurs. Safety switches shall be provided with two sets of contacts and shall be interlock wired to shut down respective equipment.
2. Current Sensing Transmitters
a. The current sen sing switch shall be self -powered with solid -state circuitry and 0 - 5vdc analog output.
b. Current sensing transmitters shall be used for kWh calculations for fans, pumps, and other miscellaneous motor loads.
c. Current sensing transmitter shall be calibrated to show a positive run status only when the motor is operating under load. A motor running with a broken belt or coupling shall indicate a negative run status.
3. Air Filter Status Differential Pressure Transmitters a. Differential pressure switches used to monito r air filter status shall be 4 -20 ma analog output type.
b. A complete installation kit shall be provided, including: static pressure tops, tubing, fittings, and air filters.
c. Provide appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.
4. Air Flow Switches
a. Differential pressure flow switches shall be bellows actuated mercury switches or snap acting micro-switches with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.
5. Air Pressure Safety Switches
a. Air pressure safety switches shall be of the manual reset type with SPDT contacts rated for 2 amps at 120VAC.
b. Pressure range shall be adjustable with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment for intended service.
6. Water Flow Switches
a. Water flow switches shall be equal to the Johnson Controls P74.
7. Low Temperature Limit Switches
a. The low temperature limit switch shall be of the manual reset type with Double Pole/Single Throw snap acting contacts rated for 16 amps at 120VAC. b. The sensing element shall be a minimum of 15 f eet in length and shall react to the coldest 18 -inch section. Element shall be mounted horizontally across duct in accordance with manufacturers recommended installation procedures. c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full cover age of the air stream, additional switches shall be provided as required to provide full protection of the air stream.
d. The low temperature limit switch shall be equal to Johnson Controls A70.
2.7 OUTPUT DEVICES
A. Actuators
1. General Requirements
a. Damper and valve actuators shall be electronic and/or pneumatic, as specified in the System Description section.
2. Electronic Damper Actuators
a. Electronic damper actuators shall be direct shaft mount, as manufactured by Johnson Controls and Belimo.
b. Modulating and two -position actuators shall be provided as required by the sequence of operations. Damper sections shall be sized based on actuator
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 14
manufacturer’s recommendations for face velocity, differential pressure and damper type. The actuator mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally closed positions of the dampers, as required. All actuators (except terminal units) shall be furnished with mechanical spring return unless otherwise specified in the sequences of operations. All actuators shall have external adjustable stops to limit the travel in either direction, and a gear release to allow manual positioning.
c. Modulating actuators shall accept 24 VAC or VDC power supply, consume no more than 15 VA, and be UL listed. The control signal shall be 2-10 VDC or 4-20 mA, and the actuator shall provide a clamp position feedback signal of 2 -10 VDC. The feedback signal shall be independent of the input signal and may be used to parallel other actuators and provide true position indication. The feedback signal of one damper actuator for each separately controlled damper shall be wired back to a terminal strip in the control panel for trouble-shooting purposes.
3. Electronic Valve Actuators
a. Electronic valve actuators shall be manufactured by the valve manufacturer or Belimo Air Controls. Each actuator shall have current limiting circuitry incorporated in its design to prevent damage to the actuator.
B. Control Relays
1. Control Pilot Relays
a. Control pilot relays shall be of a modular plug-in design with retaining springs or clips.
b. Mounting bases shall be snap-mount.
c. DPDT, 3PDT, or 4PDT relays shall be provided, as appropriate for application. d. Contacts shall be rated for 10 amps at 120VAC.
e. Relays shall have an integral indicator light and check button.
2. Lighting Control Relays
a. Lighting control relays shall be latching with integral status contacts. b. Contacts shall be rated for 20 amps at 277 VAC.
c. The coil shall be a split low-voltage coil that moves the line voltage contact armature to the ON or OFF latched position.
d. The relay shall be designed so that power outages do not result in a change-of-state, and so that multiple same state commands will simply maintain the commanded state. Example: Multiple OFF command pulses shall simply keep the contacts in the OFF position.
C. Control Valves
1. All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning and provide near linear heat transfer control. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail - safe open, closed, or in their last position. All valves shall operate in sequence with another valve when required by the sequence of operations. All control valves shall be sized by the control manufacturer, and shall be guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling loads, as specified. All control valves shall be suitable for the system flow conditions and close against the differential pressures involved. Body pressure rating and connection type (sweat, screwed, or flanged) shall conform to the pipe schedule elsewhere in this Specification.
2. Chilled water control valves shall be modulating plug, ball, and/or butterfly, as required by the specific application. Modulating water valves shall be sized per manufacturer’s recommendations for the given application. In general, valves (2 or 3-way) serving variable flow air handling unit coils shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 5 PSI. Valves (3 -way) serving constant flow air handling unit coils with secondary circuit pumps shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to 25% the actual coil pressure drop, but no less than 2 PSI. Mixing valves (3- way) serving secondary water
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 15
circuits shall be sized for a pressure drop of no less than 5 PSI. Valves for terminal reheat coils shall be sized for a 2 PSIG pressure drop, but no more than a 5-PSI drop.
3. Modulating plug water valves of the single -seat type with equal percentage flow characteristics shall be used for all hot and chilled water applications, except those described hereinafter . The valve discs shall be composition type. Valve stems shall be stainless steel.
4. Ball valves shall be acceptable for water terminal reheat coils, radiant panels, unit heaters, package air conditioning units, and fan coil units.
D. BMS Server.
1. The facility wide FX Server shall be updated to include all Convention Center systems.
E. Distributed User Interface(s).
1. The BMS system shall utilize a distributed, web browser -based, graphical user interface, served up by the supervisory controller(s) and/or BMS server.
2. The distributed user interface shall require user login upon launching the web browser and selecting the appropriate domain name or IP address.
a. Login shall require the user to enter username and strong password and be successfully authenticated.
b. User access and control privileges within the system shall be based on the user’s defined role as assigned by the system administrator.
3. The distributed user interface shall include the following features to allow operators to quickly find information within the system:
a. Incorporate all feartures of the current BMS user interface, where such features do not conflict with features inhearant in the core system user interface feature set and deammed preferred by the owner.
b. A home page displaying the following information:
1) Image of the building.
2) Current outside air temperature, today’s weather forecast, and tomorrow’s weather forecast.
3) Links to devices.
4) Links to schedules.
5) Links to point summaries.
c. A navigation tree listing a hierarchy of system components, including devices and data points.
d. A navigation tree listing a hierarchy of the building’s spaces, including any buildings, floors, and rooms, with links to the equipment, devices, and data points serving those spaces.
e. Graphical, floor plan view of the building’s spaces, embedded with dynamic links to the views of the equipment, devices, and data points serving those spaces.
4. The distributed user interface shall provide authorized operators with the following information about each data point in the system database:
a. Identification.
b. Present value.
c. Status, including normal, overridden, offline, and in alarm.
5. The distributed user interface shall provide authorized operators a check - the-box method to add alarm, trend, and totalization extensions to any data point in the system.
6. The distributed user interface shall include the following point summaries to allow operators to quickly view data points that share certain attributes:
a. All point summary.
b. Points-in-alarm summary.
c. Points-in-override summary.
d. Points-offline summary.
e. Non-normal points summary.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 16
7. The distributed user interface shall allow authorized operators to manually command writable data points in the system as part of a 16-level priority write method, defined as:
a. Emergency/Life Safety Manual Command.
b. Automatic Life Safety.
c. User Defined.
d. User Defined.
e. Critical Equipment Control.
f. Minimum On/Off.
g. User Defined.
h. Override (Manual Operator Command).
i. Demand Limiting.
j. User Defined.
k. Temperature Override.
l. Stop Optimization.
m. Start Optimization.
n. Duty Cycling.
o. Outside Air Optimization.
p. Schedule.
8. The distributed user interface shall allow authorized operators to issue temporary (adjustable time) or permanent manual commands to writable data points in the system.
9. The distributed user interface shall include an alarm console for authorized users to perform the following alarm management functions:
a. Authorized operators shall be allowed to view all alarms routed to the alarm console, with the following information:
1) Time stamp.
2) Source state.
3) Acknowledge state.
4) Source.
5) Alarm class.
6) Priority.
7) Message text.
b. Authorized operators shall be allowed to apply the following filters to include or exclude alarms shown on the alarm console:
1) Source state.
2) Acknowledge state.
3) Acknowledge required.
4) Source.
5) Alarm class.
6) Priority.
7) Normal time range.
8) Acknowledge time range.
9) User.
10) Alarm data.
11) Alarm transition.
12) Last update time range.
c. Authorized operators shall be allowed to acknowledge alarms, either individually or in bulk using the Shift or Ctrl keys.
d. Authorized operators shall be allowed to select an alarm occurrence in the alarm console and link to the view in the system showing the alarm source. e. Authorized users shall be allowed to add a note to one or more alarm records simultaneously to provide historical context for the event that trigged the alarm. f. Authorized operators shall be allowed to silence the audible alarm for one or more alarm sources.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 17
10. The distributed user interface shall include an alarm database maintenance view for authorized users to delete alarm records from the alarm database, but only after the alarms have been acknowledged and the alarm source has returned to a normal (no longer in alarm) state.
11. The distributed user interface shall include a history chart view for operators to view historical and live data in a chart over time.
a. The distributed user interface shall allow authorized operators to customize the appearance of the history charts in on or more of the following ways:
1) Chart type, included any one of the following:
a) Line chart.
b) Area chart.
c) Bar chart.
d) Stacked bar chart.
e) Discrete line chart.
f) Discrete area chart.
g) Pie chart.
2) X and Y axis range.
3) Data, background, and status colors.
4) Axis orientation.
5) Data source zooming.
6) Turning the chart grid on/off.
7) Data popups.
b. The distributed user interface shall allow operators to view multiple data points simultaneously per history chart.
c. The distributed user interface shall provide a “time zone -less” time range configuration so that operators can plot each history chart with reference to its own time zone, resulting in charts that are aligned by local time.
12. The distributed user interface shall include a history database maintenance view allowing authorized users to delete history records from the history database.
13. The distributed user interface shall allow authorized operators to export selected histories as either a table of data in a comma separated variable (*.csv) format or as the selected chart view.
14. The distributed user interface shall allow authorized operators to view, define, and change the normal, regular, and repeating events in the system schedule using a weekly scheduler view.
15. The distributed user interface shall allow authorized operators to view, define, and change partial day exceptions to the system schedule.
16. The distributed user interface shall include a calendar view to allow operators to define, and change the special events in the system schedule.
F. System Tools.
1. Supervisory Controller Configuration Tool (FX Workbench):
a. The supervisory controller configuration tool shall be a software package enabling a computer platform to be used as a stand -alone engineering configuration tool for a supervisory controller or BMS server.
b. The supervisory controller configuration tool shall create a station database for the configuration and application data.
c. The supervisory controller configuration tool shall have the same look- and-feel as the distributed user interface, regardless of whether the configuration is being done online or offline.
d. The supervisory controller configuration tool shall include the following features:
1) System component navigation tree for configured networks. 2) Integration of BACnet, N2, Lonworks, MODBUS, and supported 3rd party integrated devices.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 18
3) Configuration of customized user navigation trees.
4) Graphic view design, layout, and data source binding. 5) Alarm and event configuration.
6) Historical data management configuration.
7) Schedule configuration.
8) Graphical logic connector tool for custom programming. 9) Copying, transferring, and archiving databases.
e. The supervisory controller configuration tool shall have the capability to automatically create the following station components for Facility Explorer brand FX- PC Programmable Controllers.
1) Devices.
2) Points.
3) Default trend, alarm, and totalization extensions.
4) Graphic views (Px views).
2. Programmable Equipment Controller Configuration Tool (FX-PCT). a. The programmable equipment controller configuration tool shall be a software package enabling a computer platform to be used as a stand - alone engineering configuration tool for Facility Explorer brand of programmable equipment controllers (FX-PC series).
b. The programmable equipment controller configuration tool shall conta in a library of Johnson Controls-designed and tested applications with a check-the-box application option selector.
c. The programmable equipment controller configuration tool shall contain a logic editor to allow creation of new and editing of existing applications. d. The programmable equipment controller configuration tool shall support running in a Simulation Mode to verify the configuration prior to downloading to a live controller. e. The programmable equipment controller configuration tool shall support running in a Commissioning mode to verify the configuration while running in a live controller. f. The programmable equipment controller configuration tool shall support the following connection methods from the PC hosting the tool to the programmable equipment controllers:
1) Through a Bluetooth Commissioning Converter.
2) Through the supervisory controller, when configured for BACnet routing.
3. Bluetooth Commissioning Converter (FX-BTCVT):
a. The converter shall provide a temporary wireless connection between the SA or FC Bus and a wireless enabled portable PC.
b. The converter shall support downloading and troubleshooting programmable equipment controllers from the PC over the wireless connection. c. The converter shall employ Bluetooth Wireless Technology. d. The converter shall be powered through a connection to either the Sensor -Actuator (SA) or the Field Controller (FC) Bus.
e. The converter shall operate over a minimum of thirty three (33) feet within a building. f. The converter shall have LED indicators to provide informatio n regarding the following conditions:
1) Power - On/Off.
2) Fault – Fault/No Fault.
3) SA/FC Bus – Bus Activity/ No Bus Activity.
4) Bluetooth Communication Established/Bluetooth Communication Not Established.
g. The converter shall comply with FCC Part 15.247 regulations for low - power unlicensed transmitters.
4. Handheld VAV Balancing Sensor (FX-ATV7003).
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 19
a. The sensor shall be a light weight portable device of dimensions not more than 3.2 x 3.2 x 1.0 inches.
b. The sensor shall be capable of displaying data and setting balancing parameters for VAV control applications.
c. The sensor shall be powered through a connection to either the Sensor-Actuator (SA) or the Field Controller (FC) Bus.
d. The sensor shall be a menu driven device that shall modify itself automatically depending upon what type of application resides in the controller. e. The sensor shall contain a dial and two buttons to navigate through the menu and to set balancing parameters.
f. The sensor shall provide an adjustable time-out parameter that will return the controller to normal operation if the balancing operation is aborted or abandoned. g. The sensor shall include the following:
1) 5 foot retractable cable.
2) Laminated user guide.
3) Nylon caring case.
h. The sensor shall be Underwriters Laboratory UL 916 listed and CSA certified C22.2 N. 205, CFR47.
G. Miscellaneous Devices.
1. Local Control Panels:
a. All control panels shall be factory constructed, incorporating the BMS manufacturer’s standard designs and layouts. All control panels shall be UL inspected and listed as an assembly and carry a UL 508 label listing compliance. b. Control panels shall be fully enclosed, with perforated sub-panel, hinged door, and slotted flush latch.
c. Control panels shall include panel louvers.
d. Control panels shall include keyed lock.
e. In general, the control panels shall consist of the DDC controller(s), display module as specified and indicated on the plans, and I/O devices —such as relays, transducers, and so forth—that are not required to be located external to the control panel due to function.
f. Where specified the display module shall be flush mounted in the panel face unless otherwise noted.
g. All I/O connections on the DDC controller shall be provide via removable or fixed screw terminals.
h. Low and line voltage wiring shall be segregated. All provided terminal strips and wiring shall be UL listed, 300 -volt service and provide adequate clearance for field wiring.
i. All wiring shall be neatly installed in plastic trays or tie-wrapped. j. A 120 volt convenience outlet, fused on/off power switch, and required transformers shall be provided in each enclosure.
2. Power Supplies.
a. DC power supplies shall be sized for the connected device load. Total rated load shall not exceed 75% of the rated capacity of the power supply. b. Input: 120 VAC +10%, 60Hz.
c. Output: 24 VDC.
d. Line Regulation: +0.05% for 10% line change.
e. Load Regulation: +0.05% for 50% load change.
f. Ripple and Noise: 1 mV rms, 5 mV peak to peak.
g. An appropriately sized fuse and fuse block shall be provided and located next to the power supply.
h. A power disconnect switch shall be provided next to the power supply.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 20
3. Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS)
a. Provide for all new controls, whether in existing control panels or new. b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following, or equal:
1) Oneac-Powervar Solutions; Powervar, Inc.
c. UPS units shall provide continuous, regulated output power without using their batteries during brown-out, surge, and spike conditions. d. Load served shall not exceed 75 percent of UPS rated capacity, including power factor of connected loads.
1) Larger-capacity units shall be provided for systems with larger connected loads.
2) UPS shall provide five minutes of battery power.
e. Performance:
1) Input Voltage: Single phase, 120- or 230-V ac, compatible with field power source.
2) Load Power Factor Range (Crest Factor): 0.65 to 1.0. 3) Output Voltage: 101- to 132-V ac, while input voltage varies between 89 and 152-V ac.
4) On Battery Output Voltage: Sine wave.
5) Inverter overload capacity shall be minimum 150 percent for 30 seconds. 6) Recharge time shall be a maximum of six hours to 90 percent capacity after full discharge to cutoff.
7) Transfer Time: 6 ms.
8) Surge Voltage Withstand Capacity: IEEE C62.41, Categories A and B; 6 kV/200 and 500 A; 100-kHz ringwave.
f. UPS shall be automatic during fault or overload conditions. g. Unit with integral line-interactive, power condition topology to eliminate all power contaminants.
h. Include front panel with power switch and visual indication of power, battery, fault and temperature.
i. Unit shall include an audible alarm of faults and front panel silence feature. j. Unit with four NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R receptacles. k. UPS shall include dry contacts (digital output points) for low battery condition and battery-on (primary utility power failure) and connect the points to the DDC system. l. Batteries shall be sealed lead-acid type and be maintenance free. Battery replacement shall be front accessible by user without dropping load.
4. The Niagara 4 Hardening Guide shall be used in implementing City of Sacramento security protocols.
5. User interfaces for Windows workstation, tablet and smart phone shall be provided. Each platform user interface shall use controls and screen resolutions that are in conformance with accepted design for that specific platform.
6. Portable Operator’s Tool (Laptop Computer).
a. The laptop computer shall consist of an Intel Pen tium based laptop computer (minimum processing speed of 2.0 GHz with 2 GB RAM and a 128-gigabyte minimum solid-state drive). 1920x1080 pixel screen size. It shall include a CD-ROM drive, and appropriate connectors and cables for communication with the Ethernet network.
7. Portable Operator’s Tool (Tablet Computer)
a. The tablet computer shall have a minimum processing speed of 1.8 GHz with 32 GB RAM. 1920x1080 pixels 9.7 -10.5 screen size. 4 hr. minimum battery life. Wireless communication with the Ethernet network.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 21
2.8 FLOW MEASURING APPARATUS
A. Fan Array Air Flow Measuring Stations
1. Probe type air flow stations:
a. Fan inlet air flow measuring station shall be a two probe, aluminum or cadmium plated constructed device located in the fan inlet and shall have sensors located along the approaching airflow to measure airflow by velocity pressure or thermal dispersion technology. Stations utilizing thermal dispersion technology shall utilize hermetically sealed thermistors for each sensor and shall be factory calibrated to NIST traceable standards or tested in accordance with AMCA 611. b. The airflow traverse probes shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, adversely affect fan performance or amplify the sound level within the fan system by its presence in the airstream.
c. Fan inlet air flow measuring stations shall be accurate to ±2.0% of the measured airflow range.
2. Fan inlet pressure taps type air flow stations:
a. The air handling manufacturer shall provide the factory determined flow coefficient for the fans being furnished. The fan array airflow totalizing system shall monitor the airflow capacity of each individual fan based on the differential pressure and flow coefficient, and shall provide a totalized airflow rate to the BAS for control and monitoring purposes
b. Accuracy shall be 0.25% of full scale including non -linearity, hysteresis, deadband and non-repeatability for each fan in the array.
c. The airflow totalizing system shall utilize a 16 -bit or greater analogue to digital converter for precise conversion of the differential pressure input from each fan and a 12 bit or greater digital to analogue converter providing high resolution output to the BAS control system.
d. The fan array monitoring system shall provide individual fan failure alarming capability. The alarming function shall provide a warning alarm when an individual fan’s airflow rate is either above or below the average for all fans by a programmable percentage value. A failed fan alarm shall be initiated when the airflow rate for an individual fan goes to zero.
B. Duct Air Flow Measuring Stations
1. General:
a. Duct air flow measuring station shall be a multiple probe, aluminum constructed device located in a configuration and size equal to that of the duct it is installed.
Sensors shall be provided along the approaching airflow to measure airflow by velocity pressure or thermal dispersion technology.
b. The airflow traverse probe shall not induce a measurable pressure drop, nor amplify the sound level within the duct by its presence in the airstream. c. The number of probes, sensors on each probe or the use of an air-straightener shall be based upon the technology utilized to comply with the ASHRAE Standards for duct traversing accuracy.
d. Stations utilizing thermal dispersion technology shall utilize hermetically sealed thermistors for each sensor and shall be factory calibrated to NIST traceable standards. Stations utilizing velocity pressure shall be AMCA certified. e. Duct air flow measuring stations shall be accurate to ±2.0% of the measured airflow range down to 1000 feet per minute.
f. Airflow measuring stations shall be as manufactured by Ebtron, Air Monitor Corporation, Ruskin or Paragon Controls.
C. A remotely located microprocessor-based transmitter shall be provided for each measurement location. The transmitter shall be capable of providing individual fan airflow output and alarming
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 22
on fan array configurations. The transmitter shall be provided with a alpha-numeric, LCD display and BACnet MS/TP network connection for BAS interface.
D. Airflow measuring stations shall be as manufactured by Ruskin Mfg., Ebtron, Air Monitor Corporation or Paragon Controls.
PART 3 - PERFORMANCE/EXECUTION
A. BMS Specific Requirements.
1. Graphic Displays:
a. Provide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each system with all points as indicated on the point list. All terminal unit graphic displays shall be fr om a standard design library.
b. User shall access the various system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme and/or menu selection.
c. Display Size: The GUI workstation software shall graphically display in 1024 by 768 pixels 24-bit True Color.
2. Custom Reports:
a. Provide custom reports as required for this project
3. Actuation / Control Type
a. Primary Equipment
1) Controls shall be provided by equipment manufacturer as specified herein. 2) All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.
b. Air Handling Equipment:
1) All air handlers shall be controlled with a HVAC-DDCController. 2) All damper and valve actuation shall be electric.
c. Terminal Equipment:
1) Terminal Units (VAV, UV, etc.) shall have electric damper and valve actuation. 2) All Terminal Units shall be controlled with HVAC-DDC Controller). d. Programming:
1) All points to be named in accordance with the “Project Haystack” naming convention
2) All analog points to be trended at 1 hour intervals for the last 400 days. 3) All digital points to be trended on change of value (COV) for the last 1000 readings.
B. Installation Practices.
1. BMS Wiring:
a. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring connections required for the installation of the Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BMS Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 26 Electrical. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 26 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.
b. All BMS w iring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMS manufacturer recommendations.
c. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design responsibility of the BMS Contractor. If complications arise, howev er, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BMS Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components.
d. Class 2 Wiring:
1) All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless otherwise specified.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 23
2) Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible locations.
Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements.
e. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring. f. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.
2. BMS Line Voltage Power Source:
a. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be taken from panel boards and circuit breakers provided by Division 26. b. Circuits used for the BMS shall be dedicated to the BMS and shall not be used for any other purposes.
c. DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits.
3. BMS Raceway:
a. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”. b. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway (Wiremold) may be used as approved by the Architect.
c. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached. d. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.
4. Penetrations:
a. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BMS conduits and raceways.
b. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed by using approved fire resistive sealant.
c. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in conduit or enclosed raceway.
d. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and square.
5. BMS Identification Standards:
a. Node Identification. All nodes sh all be identified by a permanent label fastened to the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location. b. Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and troubleshooting.
6. BMS Panel Installation:
a. The BMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations. b. The BMS Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.
7. Input Devices:
a. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation. b. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
8. HVAC Input Devices – General:
a. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation. b. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever possible.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 24
c. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature wells, pressure taps, airflow stations, etc.
d. Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance with ASME guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions.
e. Outside Air Sensors:
1) Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately.
2) Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. f. Water Differential Pressure Sensors:
1) Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow-sensing device.
2) Differential pressure transmitters shall be supplied with tee fittings and shut- off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines.
3) The transmitters shall be installed in an accessible location wherever possible.
g. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” w.c.):
1) Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided. h. Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-1” to +1” w.c.):
1) Transmitters exterior sensing tip shall be installed with a shielded static air probe to reduce pressure fluctuations caused by wind
2) The interior tip shall be inconspicuous and located as shown on the drawings. i. Air Flow Measuring Stations:
1) Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow passage of the station shall be the same size as the inside airflow dimension of the duct. 2) Station flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate matching connecting ductwork.
j. Duct Temperature Sensors:
1) Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the duct and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement. 2) The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly including lock nut and mounting plate.
3) For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air temperature stratification exists such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an averaging sensor.
4) The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved element holders.
k. Space Sensors:
1) Shall be mounted per ADA requirements.
2) Provide lockable tamper-proof covers in public areas and/or where indicated on the plans.
l. Low Temperature Limit Switches:
1) Install on the discharge side of the first water or steam coil in the air stream. 2) Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern insuring each square foot of coil is protected by 1 foot of sensor.
3) For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air stream, provide additional switches as required to provide full protection of the air stream.
m. Air Differential Pressure Status Switches:
1) Install with static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filter. n. Water Differential Pressure Status Switches:
1) Install with shut off valves for isolation.
o. HVAC Output Devices:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 25
1) All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturers recommendation.
The mechanical contractor shall install all in - line devices such as control valves, dampers, airflow stations, pressure wells, etc. p. Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing. q. Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications. r. Control Valves: Shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve plugs. The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5 PSI. The maximum pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI. s. Electronic Signal Isolation Transducers: Whenever an analog output signal from the Building Management System is to be connected to an external control system as an input (such as a chiller control panel), or is to receive as an input a signal from a remote system, provide a signal isolation transducer. Signal isolation transducer shall provide ground plane isolation between systems. Signals shall provide optical isolation between systems
C. Training:
1. A total of 8 hours of training will be provided. 2 – 4 hours sessions.
2. Provide training on the FX Graphical Interface programming.
3. This orientation shall, at a minimum, consist of a review of the project as - built drawings, the control system software layout and nami ng conventions, and a walk through of the facility to identify panel and device locations.
D. Commissioning:
1. Commissioning the Facility Management System is a mandatory.
2. The contractor will provide a detailed hardware commissioning procedure for all of the control systems in the facility.
3. Provide a separate Graphic Commissioning Procedure.
4. Provide a separate Alarm Management Commissioning Procedure.
5. Commissioning shall include verification of proper installation practices by the contractor, point verification and calibration, system/sequence of operation verification with respect to specified operation, and network/server verification.
6. Commissioning documentation shall be updated upon completion of each commissioning step and final completion to ensure proper operation of the Facility Management System.
7. VAV box performance verification and documentation:
a. The BMS Contractor shall test each VAV box for operation and correct flow. At each step, after a settling time, box air flows and damper positions will be sampled.
Following the tests, a pass/fail report indicating results shall be produced. Possible results are Pass, No change in flow between full open and full close, Reverse operation or Maximum flow not achieved. The report shall be submitted as documentation of the installation.
b. The BMS Contractor shall issue a report based on a sampling of the VAV calculated loop performance metrics. The report shall indicate performance criteria, include the count of conforming and non - conforming boxes, list the non -conforming boxes along with their performance data, and shall also include graphical representations of performance.
8. Promptly rectify all listed deficiencies and submit to the Engineer that this has been done.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 23 09 23 – 26
FORMAT TEMPLATE
99 99 99 - 2
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, SPECIAL CONDITIONS and DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work of this section.
B. Section 23 05 00, General Mechanical Requirements applies to this section.
C. Sections 23 05 53 and 23 07 19.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. Work Included
1. Provide complete piping systems for conduction HVAC work including all other chemicals required for pipe flushing, cleaning, testing, etc., all as specified or shown on the drawings.
B. Provide all valves, strainers, piping supports, seismic braces, piping penetration auxiliaries, protective coverings, piping insulation, and other piping appurtenances as shown or specified for HVAC work.
C. Installation of sensing and control devices that mount on or insert into piping.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All HVAC equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, latest edition.
B. Standards: Comply with all applicable codes or standards governing process piping, system materials, application, and installation.
C. Welding Qualifications: Welders shall be certified in accordance with American Welding Society "Standard Qualification Procedure".
1.04 REFERENCES
A. Pipes And Tubes
1. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper.
2. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types K and L, water tube, annealed temper.
B. Fittings
1. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.22.
2. Cast-Copper-Alloy, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18.
3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Classes 150 and 300.
4. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy body, hexagonal stock, with ball-and- socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded, or solder-joint and threaded ends. Threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.
C. Joining Materials
1. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32, alloys to suit system requirements.
2. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, alloys to suit system requirements.
1.05 STRUCTURAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural members shall not be cut or modified in any manner without specific instructions from the structural enginee.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE MATERIALS
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 – 2
A. Copper/Soldered Joints
1. Pipe: Type L, Type K or Type M hard drawn copper tubing per ASTM B-88, plain ends.
2. Fittings: Solder type, wrought copper per ANSI Standard B16.22 or cast red bronze per ANSI Standard B16.18. Do not use T-drill.
3. Unions: Solder type, cast red bronze.
4. Joining Materials/Methods
a. Canfield, Silvabrite or equal lead free solder with a non-corrosive water based flux.
2.02 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Refrigerant Piping (R, RL, RS): Type L, hard copper ACR tubing with silver soldered joints and wrought copper fittings. Do not reduce sizes due to long runs.
1. Contractor shall have the option to use manufacturer’s “Line Sets” for total lengths of lines of 50’-0” from outdoor heat pump section to indoor fan coil. Suction lines shall be insulated as hereinbefore specified.
2. An inverted vapor line trap shall be installed in all systems where required by the heat pump manufacturer.
3. Install a liquid-line filter drier on all systems when not included by the factory equipment and recommended by the manufacturer’s installation manual.
4. Install a 5 minute outdoor unit cycle protector on all units.
5. The contractor shall be responsible to provide locking-type tamper resistant caps on all refrigerant access port located outdoors except where the refrigerant ports are located in secure locations with key access.
6. Coordinate refrigerant lines sizes on contract drawings with installed unit elevations, locations and manufacturer installation instructions. Notify engineer of any discrepancy as soon as possible and submit the required refrigerant pipe line sizes only.
2.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Building Attachments: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials, UL listing and FM approval for fire-protection systems. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Provide beam clamp retaining straps for all pipe supports where attached to steel beams.
B. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pullout and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials.
C. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
D. B-Line, finish: Electro-Chromate or hot dipped galvanized.
1. Individual: B3690, B3100 cleavis or B3110
a. Use H-104 all thread rod.
b. Use B3110 for pipe subject to movement.
2. Pipe Straps: B2007-B2072 for standard pipe, B2000-B2069, copper coated for copper.
3. For insulated pipe - B3690 pipe hangers sized to allow pipe insulation to pass continuously through the hanger.
a. Trapeze Supporting Rods: Diameter sufficient to support the load with a safety factor of 5.
b. Isolators: 319 CT or Trisolator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Install Bare Metal Pipe Isolators: Stoneman “Trisolator”, Superstrut “Cust-aStrip”, Unistrut on all non-insulated refrigerant piping.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 – 3
B. Install pipe supports on the outside of the insulation for all insulated refrigerant piping.
3.02 PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General
1. Miscellaneous: Provide all supports, anchors, concrete pads, grouting, bedding, bracing, vibration isolation, and accessories required for pumps and other equipment.
2. Support all piping with appropriate manufactured devices as specified use no wire or makeshift device.
3. The engineer prior to installation shall approve all hanger material.
4. Size hanger rods, screws, bolts, nuts, etc., according to manufacturer's recommendations.
Size hangers to fit around bare pipe, isolator, or insulated pipe shield as appropriate.
5. Use cadmium plated or galvanized hangers, attachments, rods, nuts, bolts and other accessories where exposed to weather. Hot dip galvanize all items which are not factory finished. Plating for hinged movements must be done at factory.
6. Hanger rods with C-clamp type structural attachment shall be equipped with retaining straps.
7. At each support on bare copper tubing or piping system, install an isolator; at each support point on insulated piping systems, install an insulated pipe shield.
8. Burning, welding, cutting, or drilling on any structural member may only be done if approved by the structural engineer.
9. No valve or piece of equipment shall be used to support the weight of any pipe.
10. Provide a hanger close to the point of change of direction of pipe run in either horizontal or vertical plane.
11. When hangers or supports do not come within one foot of a branch line fitting, install an additional hanger or support at the fitting.
B. Pipe Supports
1. Horizontal Lines
a. Suspend all horizontal pipes individually and not in contact with the structure except as specified below. Support each branch line with at least one hanger.
C. Parallel pipes may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Size trapeze hangers to support weight of piping plus a surcharge of 300 pounds. For three or more pipes use a size suitable for the load in accordance with manufacturers published load ratings. No deflection to exceed 1/180 of a span. Anchor rods securely to building structure.
D. Hanger Spacing Schedule: Refer to contract drawings
3.03 TESTING OF REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Test all piping at completion of rough-in, in accordance with the following schedule and show no loss in pressure or visible leaks after a minimum duration of 12 hours at the test pressure indicated. The contractor shall furnish testing equipment. Testing personnel shall be competent to conduct the tests, and demonstrate satisfactory completion of tests to the engineer.
System Tested Test Pressure Psig Test Medium
Refrigerant – Liquid 250 Nitrogen, let stand 12 hours
Refrigerant – Suction 150 and 28” vacuum Nitrogen, let stand 12 hours B. Before covering, concealing, or using the refrigerant piping system or parts thereof, test and prove tight; obtain certification of the inspector that this has been accomplished.
C. Valves and connected equipment or any system component with a pressure rating less than the system test pressure shall not be subjected to the test.
D. If systems are tested in sections, include connections to preceding tested sections in ensuing tests.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00 – 4
E. After producing the specified test pressure, disconnect the pressurizing source; do not introduce further pressure for the duration of the test period. Should any pressure loss or detectable leak occur within test period, repair piping and retest. Repeat the procedure until the system is proved tight.
F. Test all piping as noted above, with no leaks or loss in pressure. Repair or replace defective piping until tests are accomplished successfully
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply the work in this section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General: Refer to Section 23 05 00, Mechanical - General.
B. Work Included: Provide all ductwork and ductwork accessories, auxiliaries, and adjuncts for all and systems as specified or shown.
C. Work Described Elsewhere: HVAC piping, equipment, and controls are specified in other HVAC Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT WORK
A. Requirements
1. Shop Fabricated Ductwork
a. Fabricate ductwork as required by classification as described below or gauges, and of configuration and sizes shown on the Drawings. Note that duct sizes shown are net inside; where ducts are lined, fabricate larger than shown to accommodate lining with shown dimensions net inside lining.
b. Fabricate ducts and fittings as shown on drawings, or if not detailed, fabricate in accordance with SMACNA.
c. Fabricate ducts with adequate cross-bracing or reinforcing to prevent drumming; should drumming subsequently occur, provide additional reinforcement as necessary to overcome same.
d. Construct ducts to provide smooth passage for the conducted air, laying edges exposed to the airstream in the direction of air flow.
e. Fabricate elbows or other fittings for changing direction of duct with a centerline radius equal to 1.5 times the duct width unless shown otherwise or necessitated by space restrictions. Where square or short radius turns are shown or required, fit with air turning vanes.
f. Fabricate diverging transitions with side slopes of 1:6; fabricate converging transitions with side slopes of 1:2. Greater slopes may be used only where space restriction prohibits specified slopes.
2. Factory fabricated ductwork construction shall conform to applicable requirements stipulated above for shop fabricated ductwork.
B. Galvanized Steel Ductwork (GSD)
1. Rectangular Cross Section
a. Shop fabricated of prime grade lock seam for quality galvanized steel sheet in accordance with requirements stipulated above and fitted with auxiliaries and accessories as specified below and shown on the drawings.
2. Low Pressure Ductwork, up to 2" static pressure and 2,500 fpm:
3. Rectangular Duct: GSD gauge per SMACNA or C.M.C whichever is more stringent.
4. Round Duct: As manufactured by United McGill Corp or equal. Uni-Rib, UNIRIB DUCT machine formed, spiral lock seam construction spot welded and bonded seams with an intermediate standing rib for rigidity. Slip joint construction couplings with a minimum of 2" insertion length. GSD gauge per SMACNA or C.M.C whichever is more stringent.
5. Fittings: (except elbows) machine formed using SMACNA RL-1 seams with seal class B.
6. Plenums: Fabricate cross-brake panels and stiffen with galvanized steel angle iron members. Provide duct access doors as specified below and as shown on drawings.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 – 2
7. Elbows: fittings shall have a wall thickness not less than that specified for longitudinal straight ducts as shown in Table 3-2 and 3-3, SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, 4" - 8" two piece, die stamped with fully welded longitudinal seam; 9" - 30", segmented standing seam construction; 31" - 36", segmented construction with joint spot welded and bonded. Each segmented elbow shall have the number of segments as indicated by Table 3-1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible for above 1500 fpm.
C. Conical Fittings:
1. Low pressure:
a. All conical fittings shall be constructed with a minimum 2” flare around entire perimeter and a minimum 1:2 slope unless noted otherwise.
2. Medium pressure:
a. All conical fittings shall be constructed with a minimum inlet equal to 1.5 times the outlet (1.5 x D) and a length equal to 0.7 times the outlet (0.7 x D) where D equals the duct diameter.
b. All conical fittings shall be constructed per SMACNA HVAC Construction Standards Metal And Flexible, figure 2-6
D. 45 degree entry fittings:
1. All 45 degree entry fittings shall be constructed per SMACNA HVAC Construction Standards Metal And Flexible, figure 2-6.
2.02 DUCTWORK ADJUNCTS
A. Intake/Exhaust Screens: Provide ½” mesh 18 gauge galvanized iron bird screens at all exterior openings in mechanical system except where provided by others.
B. Combustion Air Openings: Provide corrosion resistant ¼” screen me sh at all combustion air openings except where ducts terminate in attics.
C. Insulation: As specified in Section 23 07 00, Insulation.
D. Test Fittings: Ventlok #699.
E. Duct Penetrations:
1. Where ducts penetrate fire separations in the building, provide fire dampe rs or smoke/fire dampers as specified, shown and required by code.
2. Where ducts penetrate roof or exterior walls, provide 24 gauge galvanized sheet metal flashing and counterflashing; solder all joints and make watertight, including under all air handlers, around all duct work penetrations, and exhaust fans.
F. Sealants
1. Design Polymerics DP1020, Ductmate PROseal high velocity duct sealant, Childers CP - 146/CP-148, Fosters 32-19/32-17, or equal, UL 723, ASTM E-84
2. Low Shrinkage, flexible, and mildew resistant conforming to NFPA 90A and 90B G. Tapes and Adhesives:
1. Pressureless Tapes: Hardcast, 4" wide Type DT 5400 mineral impregnated woven fiber tape with manufacturer's FTA-20 activator/adhesive (indoors) and RTA-50 activator/adhesive (outdoors), applied with brush or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
H. Transverse Duct Connections:
1. Traverse Joints: Ductmate or WDCI proprietary duct connection systems will be accepted.
Ductwork constructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturers gui delines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements.
TDC/TDF/T-24 shall be constructed as a SMACNA T-24 flange.
2. The Ductmate companion angle with an integral polymer mastic seal shall be securely fastened to the duct walls using self-drilling screws, rivets or spot welding. Fastener spacing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the size or duct and the
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 – 3
pressure class. The raw duct ends shall be properly seated in the integral mastic seal. A continuous strip of closed cell gasket tape, size 1/4" x 3/4", shall be installed between the mating flanges of the companion angles at each transverse joint, and the joint shall be made up using 3/8" diameter x 1" long plated bolts and nuts. Drive-on or snap-on cleats shall be used at spacings as recommended by the manufacturer.
3. The Ductmate system shall not be used for applications with duct gauges heavier than 16 gauge or lighter than 26 gauge.
4. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh Lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinal seams will be sealed with a mastic sealant. Snaplock is not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Galvanized Steel Ductwork (GSD): Except where specified or shown otherwise, use (GSD) conforming to requirements (Part 2), or cross section configuration shown, in all locations (indoor/outdoor, above/below grade, concealed/exposed).
B. Flexible Fibrous Glass Duct (FFG): Use (FFG) only where specifically called for on the drawings, as connection between terminal boxes and air outlets.
C. Equipment exhaust duct shall be in accordance with CMC Chapter 5.
D. No round-to-round saddle taps are allowed.
3.02 DUCTWORK
A. Pressure-Velocity Classification:
1. All supply ductwork on constant volume systems (low pressure):
a. All ductwork shall be constructed per SMACNA static pressure class of positive +2” and a velocity of 2500 FPM.
b. Seal all joints and seams on all ducts and plenums per SMACNA seal class B.
Pressure sensitive tapes are not allowed.
2. All return ductwork (low velocity):
a. All ductwork shall be constructed per SMACNA static pressure class of negative -2” and a velocity of 2500 FPM.
b. Seal all joints and seams on all ducts and plenums per SMACNA seal class B.
Pressure sensitive tapes are not allowed.
3. All general exhaust ductwork (low pressure):
a. All ductwork shall be constructed per SMACNA static pressure class of negative -2” and a velocity of 2500 FPM.
b. Seal all joints and seams on all ducts and plenums per SMACNA seal class B.
Pressure sensitive tapes are not allowed.
B. Broken places in galvanized coating made in forming shall be completely covered with galvanized paint.
C. All ductwork shall comply with the C.M.C and the local jurisdiction’s addendum.
D. Ducts shall be reinforced in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, Latest Edition (low pressure and medium pressure, where shown on drawings). Duct shall be diagonally creased on all four sides. Seams shall be double crimped, bent and elbows shall be made with the throat radius of all bends 12" diameters of the width of the duct wherever possible and in no case shall the throat radius be less than one diameter of the branch duct. Where space does not permit the above radius or where square elbows are indicated on the drawings, they shall be equipped with turning vanes of an ap proved type for low velocity ducts. Medium velocity ducts shall not use turning vanes and shall not use square elbows unless shown otherwise. Use Ductmate closure systems for all round and rectangular ducts.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 – 4
E. Transition pieces in the ducts shall have the sides sloped approximately one to five and no abrupt changes or offsets of any kind in the duct system will be permitted. Round to round take-offs shall be made with 45 wye fittings.
F. Ductwork Auxiliaries
1. Flexible Connectors
a. Install duct sections being fitted with a flexible connector with a 3" minimum gap between the ends being bridged by the flexible connector. Provide a generous fold in connector to allow for movement; staple and seal closure. b. Provide 26-gauge galvanized steel weather shield on top and sides of flexible duct connectors for outdoor installations. Install weather shield at same time as flexible connectors; unprotected flexible connections will be replaced with new connectors at contractor's expense if the weather shields are installed at a subsequent time.
G. Duct sizes shown on lined duct shall be clear inside insulation.
H. Paint the inside of ductwork visible through grilles and registers dull black.
I. Furnish and install 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 x 3/16" closure angles around all exposed ducts through walls and ceilings. (Both sides)
J. Furnish and install 2 x 2 x 3/16" closure angle dams around all ducts through floors. Weld corners, seal with silicone non-hardening sealant and anchor to floor.
K. Access doors shall be provided in ductwork for easy access to each fire damper and smoke/fire damper.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General
1. Perform testing and provide demonstrations as specified in other HVAC Sections.
2. Comply with requirements of Part 3, 23 05 00.
B. Duct Cleaning
1. Clean all ductwork in the shop prior to shipping. All ductwork shall be transported to the site in covered vans to eliminate contamination or shall be sealed prior to shipment and shall be protected from contamination at the site.
2. After fabrication, and during and after installation, seal sections of open ductwork with plastic sheeting to prevent the intrusion of dirt and debris.
3. After installation is complete, but before balancing and final connections are made, and with construction filters in place, blow clean all ductwork with the system fans oper ating at full air volume.
4. All return air ductwork shall be kept sealed until all construction is complete. If the air conditioning system is used during construction, the return air ductwork system shall not be used. Other means of outlets shall be used, such as leaving doors or windows open.
C. Ductwork Testing:
1. Partial disassembly and sealing of the system may be necessary for compliance with test requirements.
2. Allowable leakage shall be no greater than 1% of the design operating air volume for the entire system.
3. Equipment for conducting leakage tests shall be a leakage test kit as manufactured by United McGill Corporation or an approved equal.
4. Leakage for non duct components (fire dampers, smoke dampers, control dampers, etc.) is an integral part of overall system leakage, and these components shall be included in the duct leakage tests.
5. Contractor shall provide the engineer with a report on the leakage test(s) and a copy of certified calibration data for leakage test apparatus.
D. Demonstrations: Before enclosing ductwork operate each fire damper and smoke/fire damper in the presence of the Owners representative to show that each damper is functional.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 – 5
E. Inspections: Evidence of poor fabrication or installation, as disclosed by job site inspections, will be cause for rejection; replacement or repair of defective work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. Ducts exposed in the conditioned space shall be free of dents and blemishes. Ducts shall be mounted tight against adjacent surfaces.
G. Duct slopes for transitions shall not be more than 1:3 unless otherwise shown. No abrupt changes or offsets of any kind in the duct system is allowed.
H. All round duct exposed within the space shall be spiral duct and fittings.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND FINISHING
A. General: Comply with requirements of Part 3, 23 05 00. Adjust fan speeds as necessary.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
FLEXIBLE DUCTS 23 31 16 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply the work in this section.
1.02 SECTION INCLUDES
A. General: Refer to Section 23 05 00.
B. Work Included: Provide all ductwork and ductwork accessories, auxiliaries and adjuncts for all systems as specified or shown.
C. Work Described Elsewhere: HVAC piping, equipment, and controls are specified in other HVAC Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCT WORK
A. Factory-made air ducts shall be approved for the use intended or shall conform to the requirements of C.M.C. Standard No. 6-1.
1. Each portion of a factory-made air duct system shall be identified by the manufacturer with a label or other suitable identification indicating compliance with C.M.C. Standard No. 6-1 and its class designation. These ducts shall be listed and shall be installed in accordance with the terms of their listing.
2. All factory-made air ducts must be Approved Class 0 or Class 1.
B. Flexible Ducts: Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.
Owens-Corning Fiberglass Valuflex or equal, insulated, wire helix type, 6 inch W.C. min.
Product shall qualify as Class I Air Duct per UL181. Inner liner shall be black where visible through registers. All flexible ductwork must have a FHC not exceeding 25/50.
C. Flexible Ductwork - Circular Cross Section:
1. Thermaflex M-KE or approved equal insulated flexible glass fiber duct factory fabricated as a Class 1 air duct, constructed of 2-layers of polyester film 100% bonded together, encapsulating the galvanized steel wire. Insulated with fiberglass insulation and jacketed with a reinforced vapor barrier jacket listed and labeled as a Class 1 Air Duct. Tested in accordance with U.L. Standard 181. Meets all requirements of NFP 90-A & 90-B, CMC Standards. Inner liner shall be black where visible through registers. All flexible ductwork must have a flame and smoke spread not exceeding 25/50
2. R-Value shall be 8.0 or greater in accordance with ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards.
3. Joint sealant: Fiberglass Type II (glass fabric) Duct Tape with a UL 181 B-M rating and panduit strap, as detailed on drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Flexible Fibrous Glass Duct (FFG): Use (FFG) only where specifically called for on the drawings, as connection between terminal boxes and air outlets.
B. All ductwork shall comply with the C.M.C and the local jurisdiction’s addendum.
C. Flexible Fibrous Glass Ducts (FFG) - install as follows:
1. In a single piece not exceeding 5 feet in length.
2. With each section carrying a UL Class I label.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
FLEXIBLE DUCTS 23 31 16 – 2
3. With no sharp bends. Do not bend size 4" through 12" diameter in excess of 180 in a 5 ft. length; do not bend sizes over 12" diameter in excess of 90 in a 5 ft. length.
4. Listed flexible duct: Install flexible duct as per manufacturers instructions. With all metal -to- metal connections secured with Panduit PLT-8H clamps or stainless steel cinch clamp, apply duct sealant between the end of the duct and the collar in a 2-inch band and clamp as described above. Allow at least 48 hours before pressure testing.
5. Supported at 4 ft. centers with 24 gauge, 12" galvanized saddles.
D. Flexible Fibrous Glass Ducts (FFG) – shall not be used to replace rigid elbows or fittings per the CMC.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General
1. Perform testing and provide demonstrations as specified in other HVAC Sections.
2. Comply with requirements of Part 3, Section 23 05 00.
B. Duct Penetrations:
1. Where ducts penetrate fire separations in the building, provide fire dampers or smoke/fire dampers as specified, shown and required by code.
C. Demonstrations: Before enclosing ductwork operate each fire damper and smoke/fire damper in the presence of the Owners representative to show that each damper is functio nal.
D. Inspections: Evidence of poor fabrication or installation, as disclosed by job site inspections, will be cause for rejection; replacement or repair of defective work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DAMPERS 23 33 13 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work in this section.
B. Section 23 05 00, General Mechanical Requirements applies to this section.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All HVAC equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title-24, Part 6, latest edition.
B. Comply with UL 1/81 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 DAMPERS
A. All dampers for us in low temperature air below 50° F duct shall have non-conducting composite damper shafts with shaft bearings and air seats.
B. Manual Dampers:
1. Round Ductwork 16” and smaller (low pressure):
a. Butterfly type, volume dampers.
b. Provide locking mechanism shall be provided on either the quadrants or end bearings.
Ventlock or equal. Damper blade shall be a minimum of 22 gauge, but not less than two gauges more than the duct gauge.
c. All duct penetrations shall be gasketed to prevent air leakage. d. Provide stand-offs as required for specified insulation thickness (see section 23 07 13. e. Continuous 3/8” min rod shall be provided.
f. In locations where ducts are exposed use Ventlok #688 damper regulator for low pressure applications.
2. Rectangular Ductwork 12” high and smaller (low pressure):
a. Rectangular volume dampers shall be Air Balance #111 or equal.
3. Rectangular Ductwork larger than 12” high (low pressure):
a. Rectangular volume dampers shall be Air Balance #AC-2 or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DAMPERS
A. Install duct accessories according to applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards.
B. Install volume-control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner.
C. Ductwork shall comply with Chapter 6 C.M.C.
D. Balancing Dampers
1. Provide balancing dampers (same as volume dampers specified in this section) where shown on drawings and any other locations required to achieve proper system air balance.
In general, balancing dampers are required at all zone supply air ducts from supply air plenums, equipment, and in ducts to supply and return air grilles. All dampers shall be placed as shown. Minimum of seven duct diameters prior to the diffuser or register.
2. Damper operators shall be installed in either to side or bottom of ductwork.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DAMPERS 23 33 13 – 2
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
TURNING VANES 23 33 23 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 – SEE 23 05 00 PART 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 AIR TURNING VANES AND DEVICES
A. Ordinary type installed in elbows: Type, size, etc., as shown on drawings (see Duct Symbol Legend), fiberglass turning vanes are not acceptable. Install multiple turning vane sections with vanes 36” long or less in large elbows. Use turning vanes specifically rated for medium velocity when duct velocity exceeds 2,500 fpm.
1. Installed at duct branches or take-offs where shown: Ward Industries VNN, VNA, Airsan Accoustiturn, or equal.
2. Installed downstream of VAV boxes in supply ductwork and in all return ductwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 AIR TURNING VANES AND DEVICES
A. Provide at all square elbows and elsewhere as shown and scheduled on drawings. Do not use double thickness duct turns on turns less than 12" wide. Where height of double thickness duct turns exceeds 36", provide 1" H 1" H 16 gauge channel brace at mid-height, secure to duct at both ends. Acoustical duct turns: Where height exceeds 36" provide 16 gauge channel brace at mid-height secured to duct at both ends. Fiberglass turning vanes will not be acceptable.
B. Provide turning vanes at the return air plenum turn (horizontal to vertical) in the first floor gallery space.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS 23 33 43 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, and DIVISION 1, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, apply to the work in this section.
B. Section 23 05 00, General Mechanical Requirements applies to this section
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All HVAC equipment shall comply with California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 6, latest edition.
B. Comply with UL 181 and UL 181A for ducts and closures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Flexible Connectors: Ventlok, flexible fabric, Duralon Flexible fabric with Metalfab connectors at connections to fans and air handling equipment.
1. Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
2. Minimum fabric weight 26 oz. / sq. yd. ± 2 oz., thickness 0.019".
3. Ventfabrics Inc. Ventlon, or equal, for exterior applications, resistant to sunlight, ozone and weather.
4. Ventfabrics Inc. Ventglass, or equal, for interior applications.
5. Complies with Underwriters Laboratories Standard # 214 for fire retardancy, and is accepted by the National Fire Protection Association for vibration isolation connectors in duct systems as covered by Paragraph 2-1.2.3 NFPA Bulletin #90A.
6. Bonding Agent, Ventfabrics # 655 Adhesive or equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCTWORK AUXILIARIES
A. Flexible Connectors
1. Install duct sections being fitted with a flexible connector with a 3" minimum gap between the ends being bridged by the flexible connector. Provide a generous fold in connector to allow for movement; staple and seal closure.
2. Provide 26-gauge galvanized steel weather shield on top and sides of flexible duct connectors for outdoor installations. Install weather shield at same time as flexible connectors; unprotected flexible connections will be replaced with new connectors at contractor's expense if the weather shields are installed at a subsequent time.
3. Ductwork shall be supported separately from the fan within 3 feet of the flexible connection.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DUCT LINER 23 33 53 – 1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 – SEE 23 05 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT
A. Miscellaneous equipment not specified herein shall be furnished as scheduled on the drawings.
B. C.C.R. - Title 24 Energy Standards, Requirements: All insulation values shall meet current requirements of the C.C.R. Energy Standards.
2.02 DUCT WORK
A. Rectangular Duct, Flexible Blanket Liner: Flexible blanket made from strong, glass fibers bonded with a dark impregnated thermosetting resin as manufactured by Johns Manville or equal.
1. Air stream surface shall be protected with a smooth surface coating for minimum resistance to airflow, Permacote or equal, UL 723 compliant.
2. Flame spread not over 25, Smoke Developed not over 50.
3. The duct liner shall be suitable for direct application and service as a thermal/acoustical liner for hot or cold round ductwork at air velocities up to 6,000 fpm. a. 1” thickness
1) Liner shall have a minimum R-value of 4.2 and Conductance of 0.24 at 75oF in accordance with ASTM C518
2) Noise: Liner shall have a minimum NRC of 0.70 when tested in accordance with ASTM C423-90 and ASTM E795
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT LINER
A. Install volume-control dampers in lined duct with methods to avoid damage to liner and to avoid erosion of duct liner.
B. Duct Liner
1. Applications
a. Rectangular Ductwork Exposed in Space or Concealed Above Ceiling: Flexible Blanket/Coated Liner, 1" thickness.
2. Install duct liner in all plenums, exposed ducts and ducts for a distance of 10' on each side of all fans, where specified here and at other locations indicated on drawings.
3. On rectangular duct secure duct and plenum liner with cement stic-klips at 12" o.c. both ways to duct with Mircale adhesive, then cement the lining in place with 50% covering of Fosters #81-99 Safetee Duct-Fas adhesive. Apply a brush coat of adhesive to edges of insulation where abutted together inside ductwork. Do not leave any raw edges of liner uncoated.
4. Duct sizes shown on lined duct shall be clear inside insulation.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
LOW – VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
26 05 19 – 1
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes building wire and cable; nonmetallic-sheathed cable; direct burial cable; service entrance cable; armored cable; metal clad cable; and wiring connectors and connections.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Product requirements for wire identification.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. ANSI/NETA ATS – 2017 Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.
B. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) - Standard of Installation.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC).
D. Part 3, Title 24, - California Electrical Code (CEC).
E. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL).
1. UL-83, UL-44 – Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cables.
2. UL-1569 – Metal Clad Cable.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Product Requirements: Provide products as follows:
1. Solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.
2. Stranded conductor for feeders and branch circuits #8 AWG and larger.
3. Stranded conductors for control circuits.
4. Conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.
5. Conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.
6. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 75 feet.
7. 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet.
B. Wiring Methods: Provide the following wiring methods:
1. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire Type THHN/THWN -2 in raceway, armored cable, or metal clad cable.
2. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire Type [THHN/THWN -2] [XHHW-2] insulation, in raceway.
3. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire Type [THHN/THWN-2] [XHHW-2] insulation, in raceway.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
LOW – VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
26 05 19 – 2
4. Underground Locations: Use only building wire Type [THHN/THWN-2] [XHHW-2] insulation, in raceway.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Conductor sizes are based on copper unless indicated as aluminum or "AL".
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for building wire and [each cable assembly type].
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits.
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements are as indicated on Drawings.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine routing and lengths required.
B. Determine required separation between wire, cable and other work. Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.
C. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cerrowire
2. Essex Group Inc.
3. Southwire
4. Prysmian Group
5. Approved equal.
B. Product Description: Single conductor insulated wire.
C. Conductor: Copper.
2.2 METAL CLAD CABLE
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
LOW – VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
26 05 19 – 3
A. Manufacturers:
1. AFC.
2. Cerrowire
3. Southwire
4. Approved equal.
B. Conductor: #12 AWG Copper.
1. Ground: Internal insulated green copper with redundant grounded armor.
2. Neutral: Separate neutral per each phase conductor with identifying color strip.
3. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
4. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75- or 90-degrees C.
5. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic.
6. Armor Material: Steel.
7. Fittings: Steel or malleable iron squeeze connectors with insulated throat.
2.3 PLASTIC TAPE:
A. Black 7 mil thick general purpose electrical tape, Scotch 33 plus or equal.
2.4 HEAT SHRINK TUBING
A. Black medium/heavy dual wall adhesive flexible Polyolefin tubing, 3M or equal.
2.5 INSULATING RESIN:
A. Use two part liquid epoxy resin with resin and catalyst in premeasured, sealed mixing pouch. Scotchcast 4 or equivalent.
2.6 REDUCING ADAPTERS:
A. Burndy, Thomas and Betts or approved equal.
2.7 WIRING CONNECTORS
A. Bolted pressure connectors: Cast bronze compression bolts designed for parallel taps, tees, crosses or end-to-end connections.
B. Compression connectors: One piece tin plated copper high-compression type lugs for installation with hand or hydraulically operated crimping tools and dies.
C. Insulated spring wire connectors: Multi-part construction incorporating a steel spring enclosed with a color coded outer thermoplastic shell.
D. Insulated spring wire wet/damp location spring wire connectors: Multi-part construction incorporating a steel spring enclosed with a color coded outer thermoplastic shell pre - filled with silicone base to protect against moisture and corrosion.
E. Compression type termination lugs: Tin plated copper high-compression type lugs for installation with hand or hydraulically operated crimping tools and dies. Provide long barrel 2-hole lugs for size #4/0 AWG and larger wire where terminated to bus bars.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
LOW – VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
26 05 19 – 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify interior of building has been protected from weather.
B. Verify mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.
C. Verify raceway installation is complete and supported.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned wire and cable, including abandoned wire and cable above accessible ceiling finishes. Patch surfaces where removed cables pass through building finishes.
B. Disconnect abandoned circuits and remove circuit wire and cable. Remove abandoned boxes when wire and cable servicing boxes is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned boxes not removed.
C. Provide access to existing wiring connections remaining active and requiring access.
Modify installation or install access panel.
D. Extend existing circuits using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations or as specified.
E. Clean and repair existing wire and cable remaining or wire and cable to be reinstalled.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Route wire and cable to meet Project conditions.
B. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
C. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.
D. Special Techniques--Building Wire in Raceway:
1. Pull conductors into raceway at same time.
2. Install building wire 4 AWG and larger with pulling equipment.
E. Special Techniques - Cable:
1. Protect exposed cable from damage.
2. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels.
3. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
4. Armored Cable or Metal Clad Cable is not permitted for homerun use. Extend cable from junction/wireway box having branch circuits for the immediate area
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
LOW – VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
26 05 19 – 5
(25’ maximum length). Use conduit or electrical metallic tubing for routing branch circuit conductors from junction/wireway box to panelboard.
5. Armored Cable or Metal Clad Cable is not permitted to be routed through rated or non-rated walls.
F. Special Techniques - Wiring Connections:
1. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.
2. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise.
3. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.
4. Provide heat shrink tubing to completely cover compression connections.
5. Install [solderless tool applied pressure] [split bolt] connectors and lugs for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and larger.
6. Install insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller.
7. Encapsulate below grade splices at outlet, pull and junction boxes with specified insulating resin kits. Make all splices watertight.
8. Install waterproof wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller in outdoor or wet locations.
9. Where oversized cables are used to accommodate voltage drop, whether a single or parallel feeder, provide appropriate reducing adapter and conductors for termination.
10. Secure conductors to circuit breakers, lugs and ground/neutral bus terminations utilizing a torque screwdriver or wrench to the manufacturer’s specified torque values.
11. Terminate aluminum conductors with tin-plated, aluminum-bodied compression connectors only. Fill with anti-oxidant compound before installing conductor.
12. Install suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors.
3.5 WIRE COLOR
A. General
1. For wire sizes 10 AWG and smaller, install wire colors in accordance with the following:
a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. c. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase.
2. For wire sizes 8 AWG and larger, identify wire with colored tape at terminals, splices and boxes. Colors are as follows:
a. Black and red for single phase circuits at 120/240 volts. b. Black, red, and blue for circuits at 120/208 volts single or three phase. c. Orange, brown, and yellow for circuits at 277/480 volts single or three phase.
B. Branch Circuits: Shared neutral conductors for multiple circuits are not permitted.
Provide a separate neutral conductor for each phase conductor.
C. Neutral Conductors: White. When two or more neutrals are located in one conduit, individually identify each with proper circuit number.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
LOW – VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
26 05 19 – 6
D. Branch Circuit Conductors: Install three or four wire home runs with each phase uniquely color coded.
E. Feeder Circuit Conductors: Uniquely color code each phase.
F. Ground Conductors:
1. For 6 AWG and smaller: Green.
2. For 4 AWG and larger: Identify with green tape at both ends and visible points including junction boxes.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide visual and mechanical inspection in accordance with NETA ATS-2017, 7.3.2A.
B. Subject feeder cables sized #2 AWG and larger, rated 600 volts AC to insulation resistance test in accordance with NETA ATS-2017, 7.3.2B and CEC 110.3(A)(4).
C. Do not megger any cables after connecting to any equipment, unless specifically directed to do so by Architect.
D. Provide written test results and a final report of electrical tests per NETA ATS-2017 5.4 to Architect.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 – 1
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rod electrodes.
2. Active electrodes.
3. Wire.
4. Grounding well components.
5. Mechanical connectors.
6. Exothermic connections.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 41 00 - Facility Lightning Protection: Grounding of lightning protection system.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems.
2. IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment.
B. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. ANSI/NETA ATS – 2017 Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.
C. Part 3, Title 24, - California Electrical Code (CEC).
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes:
1. Existing Metal underground water pipe.
2. Metal building frame.
3. Concrete-encased electrode.
4. Existing Metal underground gas piping system.
5. Rod electrode.
6. Plate electrode.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Construct and test grounding systems for access flooring systems on conductive floors accordance with IEEE 1100.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 – 2
A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data on grounding electrodes and connections.
B. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground [and resistance of each electrode].
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for active electrodes.
D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL labeled.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
C. Do not deliver items to project before time of installation. Limit shipment of bulk and multiple-use materials to quantities needed for immediate installation.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Complete grounding and bonding of building reinforcing steel prior concrete placement.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL AND TELECOM GROUND BUS BARS
A. Manufacturers:
1. CPI 40153-012
2. Approved Equal
B. Product Description:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 – 3
1. Material: ¼” x 4” high x 12” wide solid copper bus bar
2. Connector: Connector for 1-hole and 2-hole barrel compression connectors.
2.2 WIRE
A. Material: Stranded copper.
B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor insulated if in conduit or above grade exposed, bare if direct buried.
C. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor insulated.
2.3 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS
A. Description: Bronze connectors, suitable for grounding and bonding applications, in configurations required for particular installation.
2.4 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS
A. Product Description: Exothermic materials, accessories, and tools for preparing and making permanent field connections between grounding system components.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove paint, rust, mill oils and surface contaminants at connection points.
3.3 EXISTING WORK
A. Modify existing grounding system to maintain continuity to accommodate renovations.
B. Extend existing grounding system using materials and methods as specified.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install ground bus bars at locations as indicated on Drawings. Install additional rod electrodes to achieve specified resistance to ground.
B. Install grounding and bonding conductors concealed from view.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Install separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.
D. Install continuous grounding using underground cold water system and building steel as grounding electrode. Where water piping is not available, install artificial station ground by means of driven rods or buried electrodes.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 26 – 4
E. Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non -current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.
F. Install branch circuits feeding isolated ground receptacles with separate insulated grounding conductor, connected only at isolated ground receptacle, ground terminals, and at ground bus of serving panel.
G. Size grounding conductors in accordance with CEC or as indicated on drawings. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing, light switch outlet boxes or metal enclosures of service equipment. Ground conduits as necessary by means of grounding bushings on terminations at panelboards and switchboards to grounding bus.
H. Permanently attach equipment and grounding conductors prior to energizing equipment.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide visual and mechanical inspection in accordance with NETA ATS, 7.13 A.
B. Perform electrical tests in accordance with NETA ATS, 7.13B.
C. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
D. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.
E. Provide written test results of grounding system and submit to Architect.
3.6 INDEPENDENT TESTING ORGANIZATION AND PERSONNEL
A. Provide written test results and a final report of electrical tests per NETA ATS 5.4 to Architect.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 – 1
SECTION 26 05 29
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Conduit and cable tray supports.
2. Formed steel channel.
3. Spring steel clips.
4. Sleeves.
5. Mechanical sleeve seals.
6. Firestopping relating to electrical work.
7. Firestopping accessories.
8. Floor and wall mounted equipment bases and supports.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:
1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
2. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
B. Part 3, Title 24, - California Electrical Code (CEC).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Firestopping (Through-Penetration Protection System): Sealing or stuffing material or assembly placed in spaces between and penetrations through building materials to arrest movement of fire, smoke, heat, and hot gases through fire rated construction.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Firestopping Materials: UL 1479, to achieve fire ratings in accordance with UL Design Numbers noted on Drawings.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of trapeze hangers.
B. Product Data:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 – 2
C. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze hangers and hangers and supports.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions:
1. Hangers and Supports: Submit special procedures and assembly of components.
2. Firestopping: Submit preparation and installation instructions.
E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.
F. Engineering Judgements: For conditions not covered by UL or WH listed designs, submit judgements by licensed professional engineer suitable for presentation to authority having jurisdiction for acceptance as meeting code fire protection requirements.
1.6 SEISMIC DETAILS AND CALCULATIONS
A. Submit details and calculations for support and anchors that are not specifically detailed on the Drawings where required by California Building Standards Code, California Code of Regulations, Title 24. Pre-approved systems may be used as noted below only if the pre-approval is current and accepted by the local agency having jurisdiction.
B. Where pre-approved bracing systems will be employed, submit:
1. System component brochure describing components used and detailed installation instructions.
2. Loads to be transmitted to the structure at anchor points.
C. Where pre-approved bracing systems are not used, submit details and calculations of proposed systems. Include:
1. Detailed drawings and calculations showing system to be installed, stamped by a Structural Engineer registered in the state of California.
2. Loads to be transmitted to the structure at anchor points.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 with 0.10-inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.
1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1- hour.
2. Floor Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings as indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-hour.
a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required.
B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non-Fire Rated Floor [and Roof] Assemblies:
Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion.
1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrat ing items connecting maximum of three stories.
2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of two stories.
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 – 3
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.
B. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage, by storing in original packaging.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60 degrees F.
B. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT SUPPORTS
A. Hanger Rods: Threaded high tensile strength galvanized carbon steel with free running threads.
B. Conduit clamps for trapeze hangers: Galvanized steel, notched to fit trapeze with single bolt to tighten.
C. Conduit clamps - general purpose: One hole malleable iron for surface mounted conduits.
D. Cable Ties: High strength nylon temperature rated to 185 degrees F. Self locking.
2.2 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL
A. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel.
2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS
A. Spring steel conduit hanger to threaded rod or wire.
2.4 SLEEVES
A. Sleeves for Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
B. Sleeves for Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:
Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.
C. Sleeves for Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire Proofing:
Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 – 4
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.
B. Verify openings are ready to receive firestopping.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material.
B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.
C. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.
D. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before using powder-actuated anchors.
E. Do not drill or cut structural members.
3.3 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Anchors and Fasteners:
1. Concrete Structural Elements: Provide expansion anchors or powder actuated anchors.
2. Concrete Surfaces: Provide self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.
3. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Provide structural backing plate.
4. Solid Masonry Walls: Provide expansion anchors.
5. Sheet Metal: Provide sheet metal screws.
B. Install conduit and raceway support and spacing in accordance with the California Electrical Code.
C. Install all support devices according to manufacturer’s guidelines and recommendations.
D. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit.
E. Do not drill through structural framing members.
F. Do not support equipment or fixtures from the roof deck. Provide necessary framing and joist hangers to span between structural members to locate hangers properly.
G. Install multiple conduit runs on common hangers.
H. Supports:
1. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel channel. Install hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Install spring lock washers under nuts.
2. Install surface mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.
3. In wet and damp locations install steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1 inch off wall.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 – 5
4. Support vertical conduit at every [other] floor.
3.4 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment.
B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.
C. Construct supports of steel members or formed steel channel. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.
3.5 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES
A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with adjustable interlocking rubber links.
B. Conduit penetrations not required to be watertight: Sleeve and fill with silicon foam.
C. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.
D. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.
Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.
E. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.
F. Where conduit or raceway penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between conduit or raceway and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and caulk.
G. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces where penetrations occur below finished ceilings.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.
3.8 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 – 1
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes conduit and tubing, surface raceways, wireways, outlet boxes, pull and junction boxes, and handholes.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 03 - Equipment Wiring Connections.
2. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
3. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.
4. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.
5. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.
C. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.
2. ANSI C80.3 - Specification for Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated.
3. ANSI C80.5 - Aluminum Rigid Conduit - (ARC).
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
2. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.
3. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
4. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports.
5. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.
6. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit.
7. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
E. Part 3, Title 24, - California Electrical Code (CEC).
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Raceway and boxes located as indicated on Drawings, and at other locations required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements. Raceway and boxes are shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Provide raceway to complete wiring system.
B. Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Provide rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit. Provide cast metal or nonmetallic outlet, pull, and junction boxes.
C. Wet and Damp Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit. Provide cast metal outlet, junction, and pull boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 – 2
D. Concealed Dry Locations: Provide rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. Provide sheet-metal boxes. Provide flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes where shown on drawings.
E. Exposed Interior Dry Locations: Use rigid steel conduit or intermediate metal conduit below eight feet or where subject to damage. Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, or electrical metallic tubing above eight feet or in electrical, mechanical or telecommunication rooms. Use sheet-metal or cast metal boxes. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. Provide hinged enclosure for large pull boxes.
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Minimum Raceway Size:
1. 3/4 inch.
2. 3/4 inch. for homeruns.
3. 1 inch outside foundation line.
4. 1 1/4” inch for communication system outlets.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for the following:
1. Metallic conduit.
2. Electrical metallic tubing.
3. Flexible metal conduit.
4. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
5. Raceway fittings.
6. Conduit bodies.
7. Pull and junction boxes.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.
Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of Product.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents:
1. Record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inch.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate mounting heights, orientation and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes.
B. Coordinate Work of this Division and Work of other Divisions in advance of installation.
Provide additional Work to overcome tight conditions at no increase in Contract Sum.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 – 3
C. Coordinate installation of outlet boxes for equipment specified in other divisions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.
C. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. Fittings shall be malleable iron with threaded fittings. Use insulated metallic bushings with lug where ground connections are required. Use plastic bushing for non-bonding applications.
D. Conduit Bodies: Bodies connected to rigid steel or intermediate conduit shall be malleable iron. Provide matching gasketed cover with at least two corrosion resistant screws.
2.2 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; steel iron squeeze type with insulated throat.
2.3 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT
A. Product Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; steel fitting with insulated throat.
2.4 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)
A. Product Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.
B. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; steel compression couplings and connectors. Box connectors shall have with insulated throat. Compression couplings and connectors for 2-inch trade size and smaller. Set screw type couplings for 2 1/2-inch trade size or larger.
C. Conduit Bodies: Provide types of shapes, and sizes to suit individual applications.
Bodies shall be malleable iron.
2.5 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; furnish 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required.
2. Boxes for shall be 1-1/2 inch deep by 4 inch square minimum for electrical.
3. Boxes for telecommunications outlets shall be 2-7/8 inch deep by 4 11/16” inch square minimum. Provide 1-gang device ring.
4. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 – 4
2.6 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify outlet locations and routing and termination locations of raceway prior to rough-in.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.
B. Remove concealed abandoned raceway to its source.
C. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets when raceway is abandoned and removed. Install blank cover for abandoned outlets not removed.
D. Maintain access to existing boxes and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
E. Extend existing raceway and box installations using materials and methods as specified.
F. Clean and repair existing raceway and boxes to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Ground and bond raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
B. Fasten raceway and box supports to structure and finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
C. Identify raceway and boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
D. Arrange raceway and boxes to maintain headroom and present neat appearance.
E. Maintain minimum 12” clearance from top of suspended ceiling to bottom of conduits where possible.
F. Electrical wiring, conduits and boxes may not be installed within 1 ½” of metal deck roofs.
3.4 INSTALLATION - RACEWAY
A. Raceway routing is shown in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route to complete wiring system.
B. Support raceway using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 – 5
C. Group related raceway; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29; provide space on each for 25 percent additional raceways.
D. Provide flexible conduit connections of short length to equipment subject to vibration and all motors; twenty-four inches maximum.
E. Provide flexible conduit for connections to light fixtures above ceilings; six foot maximum.
F. Do not support raceway with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports
G. Do not attach raceway to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
H. Do not route flexible conduit through rated or non-rated walls.
I. Construct wireway supports from steel channel specified in Section 26 05 29.
J. Route exposed raceway parallel and perpendicular to walls.
K. Route raceway installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls.
L. Maintain clearance between raceway and piping for maintenance purposes.
M. Maintain 2 inch clearance between raceway running perpendicular to piping with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
N. Maintain 12 inch clearance between raceway and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.
O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
P. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for minimum 20 minutes.
Q. Install conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes.
R. Install no more than equivalent of four 90 degree bends between boxes. Install conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams.
S. Avoid moisture traps; install junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.
T. Install fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where raceway crosses seismic, control or expansion joints.
U. Install suitable pull string or cord in each empty raceway except sleeves and nipples.
V. Install suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.
W. Close ends and unused openings in wireway.
3.5 INSTALLATION - BOXES
A. Boxes for Concealed Conduits:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 – 6
1. Flush mounted.
2. Provide raised covers for boxes to suit the wall or ceiling, construction and finish.
B. Install wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated on Drawings.
C. Adjust box location up to 10 feet prior to rough-in to accommodate intended purpose.
D. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26.
E. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only.
F. In Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 24 inches from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.
G. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonr y unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.
H. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; install with minimum 6 inches separation.
I. Provide acoustical rated moldable putty pads for all boxes located in acoustic rated walls.
J. Provide fire rated moldable putty pads for all boxes located in fire rated walls.
K. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs with screws, not nails.
Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness.
L. Install stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.
M. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.
N. Install adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.
O. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires or other piping systems.
P. Support boxes independently of conduit.
Q. Install gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box.
R. Install gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.
S. Boxes located below eight feet in exposed interior dry locations shall be one piece drawn steel or cast type.
3.6 INSTALLATION CONCRETE COMPOSITE HANDHOLES
A. Install boxes flush with finished grade or surface material.
B. Provide hold down bolts for all covers.
C. Provide minimum 12” depth of crushed rock or pea gravel below boxes for drainage.
Ground bond steel cover plate with insulated green grounding conductor.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 33 – 7
3.7 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS
A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements.
B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified in other Sections.
C. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as indicated on Drawings.
D. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
3.8 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.
B. Install knockout closures in unused openings in boxes.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material.
B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 – 1
SECTION 26 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Nameplates.
2. Labels.
3. Engraved cover plates.
4. Wire markers.
5. Conduit markers.
6. Underground Warning Tape.
7. Lockout Devices.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.
2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color coding, tag number, location, and function.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide material supplied by a manufacturer producing identification systems.
B. Comply with OSHA, NFPA or local jurisdiction identification requirements for electrical systems.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Install labels or nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES
A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved white letters on contrasting background color.
1. Provide minimum letter height as follows:
a. For Panelboards, Distribution boards, Switchboards, Battery Panels and Motor Control Center: 1/2-inch letters to identify equipment designation.
Use 1/4-inch letters to identify voltage, phase and wires. b. For Individual Circuit Breakers, Switches and Motor Starters in Distribution panelboards, Distribution boards, Switchboards, Switchgear and Motor Control Centers use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation. Use 1/8-inch letters to identify all other.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 – 2
c. For Individual mounted Circuit Breakers, Disconnect Switches, Enclosed Switches and motor Starters use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation. Use 1/8-inch letters to identify all others. d. For Transformers use 1/2-inch letters to identify equipment designation.
Use 1/4-inch letters to identify primary and secondary voltages, primary disconnect location, and other specified data.
e. For equipment cabinets, terminal cabinets, control panels and other cabinet enclosed apparatus use 3/8-inch letters to identify equipment designation.
B. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/16 inch for signs up to 20 square inches, or 8 inches in length; 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Furnish with pre-punched holes for mechanical fasteners.
2.2 LABELS
A. Labels: Thermal transfer laminated adhesive tape, with 1/8-inch black letters on clear tape cartridge.
2.3 WIRE MARKERS
A. Description: Self-adhering, pre-printed, machine printable or write-on, self-laminating vinyl wrap around strips. Inscribe blank markers using the printer or pen recommended by the manufacturer for this purpose.
B. Legend:
1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings.
2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on shop drawings.
3. Data Outlets: Patch Panel port number as installed in the field.
2.4 CONDUCTOR MARKERS
A. Colored vinyl plastic electrical tape, 3/4 inch wide, for identification of electrical phase conductors.
2.5 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS
A. Description: Labels fastened with adhesive.
B. Color:
1. 480/277 Volt System: Orange lettering on white background.
2. 208/120 Volt System: Blue lettering on white background.
C. Legend:
1. Medium Voltage System: HIGH VOLTAGE.
2. 480 Volt System: 480 VOLTS.
3. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.
2.6 LOCKOUT DEVICES
A. Lockout Hasps:
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 – 3
1. Reinforced nylon hasp with erasable label surface; size minimum 7-1/4 x 3 inches.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Install identification on existing electrical equipment to remain in accordance with this section.
B. Install identification on unmarked existing electrical equipment.
C. Replace lost nameplates, labels, and markers.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.
B. Nameplate Installation:
1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.
2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.
3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners.
4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using rivets.
a. Provide color coded nameplates as applicable, with the following information:
1) Equipment or device designation.
2) Amperage, KVA or horsepower rating, where applicable. 3) Voltage or signal system name.
4) "Served from" identification.
5) Miscellaneous information as shown in "Examples".
6) Examples:
(a) Panels:
2EH1
225A
277/480V, 3PH, 4W
Served From:2EHD1
(b) Transformers:
ETX-1
150KVA
480V - 120/208V, 3PH, 4W
Served From: EHD1
Load Served: EL1
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 – 4
(c) Motor Control Centers:
Main Nameplate: Each Compartment
MCC-NH1 EF-1
600A Main Bus 20 HP
480V, 3PH, 3W Switch Size: 100A
Served From: HDD1A-2 Starter Size: 1
(d) Disconnects or Individual Motor Starters.
EF-1
20HP
480V, 3PH,3W
Served From: MCCNH-1
(e) Signal:
STB-3
Public Address System
Served From: STBM
C. Nameplates for power system distribution equipment and devices are to be colored as follows: (Unless otherwise noted)
1. 277/480 VAC Normal – Black with white letters
2. 120/208 VAC Normal - Black with white letters
D. Nameplates for signal systems equipment and devices are to be black except as follows:
1. Security/Card access/CCTV systems - Green with white letters
2. Clock, intercom, sound, MATV, CATV: Magenta with white letters
3. Building management system (BMS): White with black letters
E. Label Installation:
1. Install label parallel to cover plate lines.
2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations, receptacles , and switches.
3. Locate the top of label 1/2 inch below the top edge of coverplates.
4. Install label for multi-outlet assembly receptacles.
5. Install labels for permanent adhesion.
F. Wire Marker Installation:
1. Install wire marker for each conductor at [panelboard gutters] [, pull boxes] [, outlet and junction boxes] [, and] each load connection.
2. Provide colored plastic phase tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 3 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
G. Junction box identification:
1. Boxes shall be identified with permanent felt tip marker on cover indicating panel and circuit numbers. Paint junction box covers using the color coding listed below.
H. Raceway Marker Installation:
1. Install raceway marker for each raceway longer than 10 feet.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 53 – 5
2. Raceway Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center.
3.4 WARNING, CAUTION AND INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Provide warning, caution or instruction signs where required by OSHA, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems.
1. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system of equipment operation.
2. Provide polyester film self-adhesive signs for indoor/outdoor equipment and door warning. Use rigid polyethylene non-adhesive signs where adhesives will not work; for example, installing on a metal fence. Provide sign color and marking that meets OSHA regulations. For example, DANGER (red background with white letters), HIGH VOLTAGE (white with black letters. a. Use 2 by 4-inch signs for small equipment or enclosure doors. b. Use 7 by 10 inch or 10 by 14-inch signs for large equipment or enclosure doors.
B. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white letters on red background with minimum 3/8-inch-high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations.
3.5 Firestopping
A. Firestopping shall be labeled at each location where installed, on each side of the penetrated fire barrier, and within 12 in. of the firestopping material.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 1
SECTION 26 09 33
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Digital Occupancy and Daylighting Sensor Control
2. Relay Panels
3. Emergency Lighting Control (if applicable)
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
2. Section 26 51 00 – Interior Lighting.
3. Section [25000] – Integrated Automation] Building integrator shall provide integration of the lighting control system with Building Automation Systems.
4. Drawings and general provision of the Contact, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section
C. Control Intent – Control Intent includes, but is not limited to:
1. Defaults and initial calibration settings for such items as time delay, sensitivity, fade rates, etc.
2. Initial sensor and switching zones
3. Initial time switch settings
4. Task lighting and receptacle controls
5. Emergency Lighting control (if applicable)
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE).
B. International Organization for Standardization (ISO) C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
1. 916 – Energy Management Equipment.
2. 924 – Emergency Lighting
E. All sensors shall be California Title 24 compliant.
F. Building Codes: All units shall comply with applicable, local building codes.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION & OPERATION
A. The Lighting Control and Automation system as defined under this section covers the following equipment:
1. Digital Room Controllers – Self-configuring, digitally addressable one, two or three relay controllers with 0-10 volt or forward phase control dimming outputs (if applicable) and single relay application-specific plug load controllers.
2. Digital Occupancy Sensors – Self-configuring, digitally addressable and calibrated occupancy sensors with LCD display and two-way active infrared (IR) communications.
3. Digital Switches – Self-configuring, digitally addressable pushbutton switches, dimmers, and scene switches with two-way active infrared (IR) communications.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 2
4. Digital Photosensors – Single-zone closed loop and multi-zone open loop daylighting sensors with two-way active infrared (IR) communications can provide switching, bi-level, tri-level or dimming control for daylight harvesting.
5. Configuration Tools – Handheld remote for room configuration provides two way infrared (IR) communications to digital devices and allows complete configuration and reconfiguration of the device / room from up to 30 feet away. Unit to have Organic LED display, simple pushbutton interface, and allow bi-directional communication of room variables and occupancy sensor settings. Computer software also customizes room settings.
6. Handheld remotes for personal control – One-button dimming, two-button on/off, or five-button scene remotes provide control using infrared communications.
Remote may be configured in the field to control selected loads or scenes without special tools.
7. Digital Lighting Management (DLM) local network – Free topology, plug-in wiring system (Cat 5e) for power and data to room devices.
8. Network Bridge – provides BACnet MS/TP-compliant digital networked communication between rooms, panels and the Segment Manager or building automation system (BAS).
9. Segment Manager – provides web browser-based user interface for system control, scheduling, power monitoring, room device parameter administration a nd reporting.
10. LILM Lighting Integrator Relay Panel – provides up to 8, 24, or 48 120/277/347 V, 20 Amp mechanically held relays. Relays include a manual override and a single push-on connector for easy installation or removal from the panel. Panel includes an integral OLED user interface and circuit boards to allow a simple push button override and status indicator per relay, and local Cat 5e networks for DLM occupancy sensors and switches for control of relays. Panel shall communicate over the segment network wiring to the segment manager for time- of-day programming.
11. Emergency Lighting Control Unit (ELCU) – allows a standard lighting control device to control emergency lighting in conjunction with normal lighting in any area within a building.
1.4 LIGHTING CONTROL APPLICATIONS
A. Unless relevant provisions of the applicable local Energy Codes are more stringent, provide a minimum application of lighting controls as follows:
1. Space Control Requirements – Provide occupancy/vacancy sensors with Manual-ON functionality in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or other applications where hands-free operation is desirable and Automatic-ON occupancy sensors are more appropriate. Provide Manual-ON occupancy/vacancy sensors for any enclosed office, conference room, meeting room, open plan system and training room. For spaces with multiple occupants, or where line-of-sight may be obscured, provide ceiling- or corner-mounted sensors and Manual-ON switches.
2. Bi-Level Lighting – Provide multi-level controls in all spaces except toilet rooms, storerooms, library stacks, or applications where variable dimming is used.
3. Task Lighting / Plug Loads – Provide automatic shut off of non-essential plug loads and task lighting in all spaces except toilet rooms and storerooms. Provide Automatic-ON of plug loads whenever spaces are occupied. For spaces with multiple occupants a single shut off consistent with the overhead lighting may be used for the area.
4. Daylit Areas – All luminaries within code defined daylight zones shall be controlled separately from luminaires outside of daylit zones. Luminaires closest to the daylight aperture shall be controlled separately from luminaires farther from the daylight aperture, within the daylight zone.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 3
5. Daytime setpoints for total ambient illumination (combined daylight and electric light) level that initiate dimming shall be programmed to be not less than 125% of the nighttime maintained designed illumination levels.
6. Multiple-leveled switched daylight harvesting controls may be utilized for areas marked on drawings.
7. Provide smooth and continuous daylight dimming for areas marked on drawings.
Daylighting control system may be designed to turn off electric lighting when daylight is at or above required lighting levels, only if system functions to turn lamps back on at dimmed level, rather than turning full-on prior to dimming.
8. Conference, meeting, training, auditoriums, and multipurpose rooms shall have controls that allow for independent control of each local control zone. Rooms larger than 300 square feet shall instead have at least four (4) pre-set lighting scenes unless otherwise specified. Occupancy / vacancy sensors shall be provided to extinguish all lighting in the space.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals Package: Submit the shop drawings, and the product data specified b elow at the same time as a package.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Composite wiring and/or schematic diagram of each control circuit as proposed to be installed (standard diagrams will not be accepted).
2. Scale drawing for each area showing exact location of each sensor, room controller, and digital switch.
C. Product Data: Catalog sheets, specifications and installation instructions.
D. Include data for each device which:
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years’ experience in manufacture of lighting controls.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment:
1. Ambient temperature: 0° to 40° C (32° to 104° F).
2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide a five year limited manufacturer’s warranty on DLM room control devices and HDR relays. Provide a one year limited manufacturer’s warranty on lighting control panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer:
1. WattStopper
a. System: Digital Lighting Management (DLM)
2.2 DIGITAL WALL SWITCH OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM
A. Wallbox mounted passive infrared PIR or dual technology (passive infrared and ultrasonic) digital occupancy sensor with 1 or 2 switch buttons. Available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, red and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening.
Furnish the Company’s system which accommodates the square-foot coverage
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 4
requirements for each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.
B. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide scrolling LCD display for digital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:
1. Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:
a. Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments
b. Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments
c. Test mode – Five second time delay
d. Detection technology – PIR, Dual Technology activation and/or re- activation.
e. Walk-through mode
f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.
2. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.
3. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.
4. Device Status LEDs including:
a. PIR detection
b. Ultrasonic detection
c. Configuration mode
d. Load binding
5. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.
6. Assignment of local buttons to specific loads within the room without wiring or special tools
7. Manual override of controlled loads.
C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.
D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.
E. Low voltage momentary pushbuttons shall include the following features:
1. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:
a. Bi-level LED
b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch
c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active.
2. The following button attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:
a. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).
b. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.
c. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change. d. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.
e. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.
f. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.
2.3 DIGITAL WALL OR CEILING MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSOR SYSTEM A. Wall or ceiling mounted (to suit installation) passive infrared (PIR), ultrasonic or dual technology digital (passive infrared and ultrasonic) occupancy sensor. Furnish the Company’s system which accommodates the square-foot coverage requirements for
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 5
each area controlled, utilizing room controllers, digital occupancy sensors and accessories which suit the lighting and electrical system parameters.
B. Digital Occupancy Sensors shall provide graphic LCD display for dig ital calibration and electronic documentation. Features include the following:
1. Digital calibration and pushbutton programming for the following variables:
a. Sensitivity – 0-100% in 10% increments
b. Time delay – 1-30 minutes in 1 minute increments
c. Test mode – Five second time delay
d. Detection technology – PIR, Ultrasonic or Dual Technology activation and/or re-activation.
e. Walk-through mode
f. Load parameters including Auto/Manual-ON, blink warning, and daylight enable/disable when photosensors are included in the DLM local network.
2. One or two RJ-45 port(s) for connection to DLM local network.
3. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver to allow remote programming through handheld commissioning tool and control by remote personal controls.
4. Device Status LEDs including:
a. PIR detection
b. Ultrasonic detection
c. Configuration mode
d. Load binding
5. Assignment of occupancy sensor to a specific load within the room without wiring or special tools.
6. Manual override of controlled loads.
C. Units shall not have any dip switches or potentiometers for field settings.
D. Multiple occupancy sensors may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required.
E. WattStopper product numbers: LMPX, LMDX, LMPC, LMUC, LMDC
2.4 DIGITAL WALL SWITCHES
A. Low voltage momentary pushbutton switches in 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 8 button configuration; available in white, light almond, ivory, grey, red and black; compatible with wall plates with decorator opening. Wall switches shall include the following features:
1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for use with personal and configuration remote controls.
2. Removable buttons for field replacement with engraved buttors and/or alternate color buttons. Button replacement may be completed without removing the switch from the wall.
3. Red configuration LED on each switch that blinks to indicate data transmission.
4. Blue Load/Scene Status LED on each switch button with the following characteristics:
a. Bi-level LED
b. Dim locator level indicates power to switch
c. Bright status level indicates that load or scene is active
5. Dimming switches shall include seven bi-level LEDs to indicate load levels using 14 steps.
B. Two RJ-45 ports for connection to DLM local network.
C. Multiple digital wall switches may be installed in a room by simply connecting them to the free topology DLM local network. No additional configuration will be required to achieve multi-way switching.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 6
D. The following switch attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:
1. Load and Scene button function may be reconfigured for individual buttons (from Load to Scene, and vice versa).
2. Individual button function may be configured to Toggle, On only or Off only.
3. Individual scenes may be locked to prevent unauthorized change.
4. Fade Up and Fade Down times for individual scenes may be adjusted from 0 seconds to 18 hours.
5. Ramp rate may be adjusted for each dimmer switch.
6. Switch buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.
E. WattStopper product numbers: LMSW-101, LMSW-102, LMSW-103, LMSW-104, LMSW- 105, LMSW-108, LMDM-101.
2.5 HANDHELD REMOTE CONTROLS
A. Battery-operated handheld switches in 1, 2 and 5 button configuration for remote switching or dimming control. Remote controls shall include the following features:
1. Two-way infrared (IR) transceiver for line of sight communication with DLM local network within up to 30 feet.
2. Blue LED on each button confirms button press.
3. Load buttons may be bound to any load on a room controller and are not load type dependant; each button may be bound to multiple loads.
4. Inactivity timeout to save battery life.
B. A wall mount holster and mounting hardware shall be included with each remote control C. WattStopper part numbers: LMRH-101, LMRH-102, LMRH-105.
2.6 ROOM CONTROLLERS
A. Room Controllers automatically bind the room loads to the connected devices in the space without commissioning or the use of any tools. Room Controllers shall be provided to match the room lighting load and control requirements. The controllers will be simple to install and will not have, dip switches, potentiometers or require special configuration.
The control units will include the following features:
1. Automatic room configuration to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the devices in the room.
2. Simple replacement – Using the default automatic configuration capabilities, a room controller may be replaced with an off-the-shelf unit without requiring any configuration or setup.
3. Device Status LEDs to indicate:
a. Data transmission
b. Device has power
c. Status for each load
d. Configuration status
4. Quick installation features including:
a. Standard junction box mounting
b. Quick low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 patch cable
5. Plenum rated
6. Manual override and LED indication for each load
7. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC, 60 Hz), or 347 VAC, 60 Hz (selected models only)
8. Zero cross circuitry for each load.
B. On/Off Room Controllers shall include:
1. One or two relay configuration
2. Efficient 150 mA switching power supply
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 7
3. Three RJ-45 DLM local network ports
4. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-101, LMRC-102,
C. On/Off Dimming enhanced Room Controllers shall include:
1. Real time current monitoring
2. Multiple relay configurations
a. One, two or three relays (LMRC-21x series)
b. One or two relays (LMRC-22x series)
3. Efficient 250 mA switching power supply
4. Four RJ-45 DLM local network ports.
5. One dimming output per relay
a. Where indicated, one 0-10 volt analog output per relay for control of compatible ballasts and LED drivers. The 0-10 volt output shall automatically open upon loss of power to the Room Controller to assure full light output from the controlled lighting. (LMRC-21x series) b. Where indicated, one forward phase control line voltage dimming output per relay for control of compatible two-wire or three-wire ballasts, LED drivers, MLV, forward phase compatible ELV, neon/cold cathode and incandescent loads. (LMRC-22x series)
6. The following dimming attributes may be changed or selected using a wireless configuration tool:
a. Establish preset level for each load from 0-100%
b. Set high and low trim for each load
c. Set lamp burn in time for each load up to 100 hours
7. WattStopper product numbers: LMRC-211, LRMC-212, LRMC-213, LMRC-221, LMRC-222,
D. Plug Load Room Controllers shall include:
1. One relay configuration
2. Automatic-ON/OFF configuration
3. Real time current monitoring (LMPL-201 only)
4. Efficient switching power supply
a. 150mA (LMPL-101) or
b. 250mA (LMPL-201)
5. RJ-45 DLM local network ports
a. Three RJ-45 ports (LMPL-101) or
b. Four RJ-45 ports (LMPL-201)
6. WattStopper product numbers: LMPL-101, LMPL-201.
2.7 DIGITAL PHOTOSENSORS
A. Digital photosensors work with room controllers to provide automatic switching, bi -level, or tri-level or dimming daylight harvesting capabilities for any load type connected to a room controller. Closed loop photosensors measure the ambient light in the space and control a single lighting zone. Open loop photosensors measure incoming daylight in the space, and are capable of controlling up to three lighting zones. Photosensors shall be interchangeable without the need for rewiring.
B. Digital photosensors include the following features:
1. An internal photodiode that measures only within the visible spectrum, and has a response curve that closely matches the photopic curve. The photodiode shall not measure energy in either the ultraviolet or infrared spectrums. The photocell shall have a sensitivity of less than 5% for any wavelengths less than 400 nanometers or greater than 700 nanometers.
2. Sensor light level range shall be from 1-6,553 footcandles (fc).
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 8
3. The capability of ON/OFF, bi-level or tri-level switching, or dimming, for each controlled zone, depending on the selection of room controller(s) and load binding to room controller(s).
4. For switching daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide a field-selectable deadband, or a separation, between the “ON Setpoint” and the “OFF Setpoint” that will prevent the lights from cycling excessively after they turn off.
5. For dimming daylight harvesting, the photosensor shall provide the option, when the daylight contribution is sufficient, of turning lights off or dimming lights to a field-selectable minimum level.
6. Optional wall switch override to allow occupants to reduce lighting level to increase energy savings or, if permitted by system administrator, raise lighting levels for a selectable period of time or cycle of occupancy.
7. Infrared (IR) transceiver for configuration and/or commissioning with a handheld configuration tool, to transmit detected light level to wireless configuration tool, and for communication with personal remote controls.
8. Red configuration LED that blinks to indicate data transmission.
9. Blue status LED indicates test mode, override mode and load binding.
10. Recessed switch to turn controlled load(s) ON and OFF.
11. One RJ-45 port for connection to DLM local network.
12. A choice of products with adjustable tubes and optional mounting brackets to accommodate multiple mounting methods and building materials. The photosensors may be mounted on a ceiling tile, skylight light well, suspended lighting fixture or backbox. Standard tube photosensors accommodate mounting materials from 0-0.62” thickness (LMLS-400, LMLS-500). Extended tube photosensors accommodate mounting materials from 0.62”-1.25” thickness (LMLS-400-L, LMLS-500-L). Mounting brackets are compatible with J boxes (LMLS-MB1) and wall mounting (LMLS-MB2).
13. Any load or group of loads in the room can be assigned to a daylighting zone .
14. Each load within a daylighting zone can be individually enabled or disabled for discrete control (load independence).
C. Closed loop digital photosensors include the following additional features:
1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 100 degree angle, cutting off the unwanted light from bright sources outside of this cone.
2. Automatic self-calibration, initiated from the photosensor, a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.
3. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following manual calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.
For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints for each zone shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation, a proportional control algorithm shall maintain the design lighting level in each zone.
4. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-400, LMLS-400-L.
D. Open loop digital photosensors include the following additional features:
1. An internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.
2. Automatically establishes application-specific setpoints following manual calibration using a wireless configuration tool or a PC with appropriate software.
For switching operation, an adequate deadband between the ON and OFF setpoints for each zone shall prevent the lights from cycling; for dimming operation, a proportional control algorithm shall maintain the design lighting level in each zone.
3. Each of the three discrete daylight zones can include any non overlapping group of loads in the room. WattStopper Product Number: LMLS-500, LMLS-500-L.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 9
2.8 ROOM NETWORK (DLM Local Network)
A. The DLM local network is a free topology lighting control physical connection and communication protocol designed to control a small area of a building. Digital room devices connect to the network using CAT 5e cables with RJ-45 connectors which provide both data and power to room devices. Features of the DLM local network include:
1. Plug n’ Go automatic configuration and binding of occupancy sensors, switches and lighting loads to the most energy-efficient sequence of operation based upon the device attached.
2. Simple replacement of any device in the network with a standard off the shelf unit without requiring commissioning, configuration or setup.
3. Push n’ Learn configuration to change the automatic configuration, including binding and load parameters without tools, using only the buttons on the digital devices in the local network.
4. Two-way infrared communications for control by handheld remotes, and configuration by a handheld tool including adjusting load parameters, sensor configuration and binding, within a line of sight of up to 30 feet from a sensor, wall switch or IR receiver.
2.9 CONFIGURATIONS TOOLS
A. A configuration tool facilitates optional customization of DLM local networks , and is used to set up open loop daylighting sensors. A wireless configuration tool features infrared communications, while PC software connects to each local network via a USB interface.
B. Features and functionality of the wireless configuration tool shall include:
1. Two-way infrared (IR) communication with DLM IR-enabled devices within a range of approximately 30 feet.
2. High visibility organic LED (OLED) display, pushbutton user interface and menu - driven operation.
3. Read, modify and send parameters for occupancy sensors, daylighting sensors, room controllers and buttons on digital wall switches.
4. Save up to nine occupancy sensor setting profiles, and apply profiles to selected sensors.
5. Temporarily adjust light level of any load(s) on the local network, and incorporate those levels in scene setting.
6. Adjust or fine-tune daylighting settings established during auto-commissioning, and input light level data to complete commissioning of open loop daylighting controls.
C. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMCT-100, LMCI-100/LMCS-100
2.10 NETWORK BRIDGE
A. The network bridge module connects a DLM local network to a BACnet-compliant segment network for communication between rooms, panels and a segment manager or BAS. Each local network shall include a network bridge component to provide a connection to the local network room devices. The network bridge shall use industry standard BACnet MS/TP network communication.
1. The network bridge shall be provided as a separate module connected on the local network through an available RJ-45 port.
2. Provide Plug n’ Go operation to automatically discover room devices connected to the local network and make all device parameters visible to the segment manager via the segment network. No commissioning shall be required for set up of the network bridge on the local network.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 10
3. The network bridge shall automatically create standard BACnet objects for selected room device parameters to allow any BACnet-compliant BAS to include lighting control and power monitoring features as provided by the DLM room devices on each local network. Standard BACnet objects shall be provided as follows:
a. Read/write the normal or after hours schedule state for the room b. Read the detection state of the occupancy sensor
c. Read/write the On/Off state of loads
d. Read/write the dimmed light level of loads
e. Read the button states of switches
f. Read total current in amps, and total power in watts through the room controller
g. Read/write occupancy sensor time delay, PIR sensitivity and ultrasonic sensitivity settings
h. Activate a preset scene for the room
i. Read/write daylight sensor fade time and day and night setpoints j. Read the current light level, in footcandles, from interior and exterior photosensors and photocells
k. Set daylight sensor operating mode
l. Read/write wall switch lock status
m. Read watts per square foot for the entire controlled room n. Write maximum light level per load for demand response mode o. Read/write activation of demand response mode for the room p. Active/restore demand response mode for the room
4. WattStopper product numbers: LMBC-300
2.11 SEGMENT MANAGER
A. The Digital Lighting Management system shall include at least one segment manager to manage network communication. It shall be capable of serving up a graphical user interface via a standard web browser. Each segment manager shall have integral support for one, two or three segment networks as indicated. Segment networks may alternately be connected to the segment manger via external routers and switches, using standard Ethernet structured wiring. Each router shall accommodate one segment network.
Provide the quantity of routers and switches as shown on the plans.
B. Operational features of the Segment Manager shall include the following:
1. Connection to PC or LAN via standard Ethernet TCP/IP.
2. Easy to learn and use graphical user interface, compatible with Internet Explorer 8, or equal browser.
3. Log in security capable of restricting some users to view-only or other limited operations.
4. Automatic discovery of DLM devices and panels on the segment network(s).
Commissioning beyond activation of the discovery function shall not be required to provide communication, monitoring or control of all local networks and lighting control panels.
5. After discovery, all rooms and panels shall be presented in a standard navigation tree format. Selecting a device from the tree will allow the device settings and operational parameters to be viewed and changed by the user.
6. Ability to view and modify room device operational parameters. It shall be possible to set device parameters independently for normal hours and after hours operation.
7. Ability to set up schedules for rooms and panels. Schedules shall automatically set controlled zones or areas to either a normal hours or after hours mode of operation.
8. Ability to group rooms and loads for common control by schedules, switches or network commands.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 11
9. Ability to monitor connected load current and display power consumption for areas equipped with room controllers incorporating the integral current monitoring feature.
10. Provide capabilities for integration with a BAS via BACnet protocol. At a minimum, the following points shall be available to the BAS via BACnet IP connection to the segment manager: room occupancy state; individual occupancy sensor state; scene activation; schedule mode; room lighting power; room plug-load power; load ON/OFF state; and load dimming level.
C. WattStopper Product Numbers: LMSM-201, LMSM-603, NB-ROUTER, NB-SWITCH, NB- SWITCH-8.
2.12 LILM LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
A. Provide lighting control panels in the locations and capacities as indicated on the plans and schedules. Each panel shall be of modular construction and consist of the following components:
1. Enclosure/Tub shall be NEMA 1, sized to accept an interior with 1 - 8 relays, 1 - 24 relays and 6 four-pole contactors, or 1 - 48 relays and 6 four-pole contactors.
2. Cover shall be configured for surface or flush wall mounting of the panel as indicated on the plans. The panel cover shall have a hinged and lockable door with restricted access to line voltage section of the panel.
3. Interior assembly shall be supplied as a factory assembled component specifically designed and listed for field installation. The interior construction shall provide total isolation of high voltage (Class 1) wiring from low voltage (Class 2) wiring within the assembled panel. The interior assembly shall include intelligence boards, power supply, DIN rails for mounting optional Class 2 control devices, and individually replaceable latching type relays. The panel interiors shall include the following features:
a. Removable, plug-in terminal blocks with screwless connections for all low voltage terminations.
b. Individual terminal block, override pushbutton, and LED status light for each relay.
c. Direct wired switch inputs associated with each relay and group channel shall support two- or three-wire, momentary or maintained contact switches or 24VDC input from occupancy sensors.
d. Automatic support for occupancy sensor sequence of operation. Direct wired low voltage inputs automatically reconfigure when connected to a WattStopper occupancy sensor head. Occupancy sensor shall switch lighting on and off during unoccupied periods but shall not turn lighting off during scheduled occupancy periods.
e. Digital inputs (four RJ-45 jacks) shall support 1-, 2-, 3-, 4-, and 8-button digital switches and digital occupancy sensors.
f. Isolated contacts within each relay shall provide true relay state to the electronics. True relay state shall be indicated by the on-board LED and shall be available to external control devices and systems. g. Automatically sequenced operation of relays to reduce impact on the electrical distribution system when large loads are controlled simultaneously.
h. Group, channel, and pattern control of relays shall be provided through a simple keypad interface within the panel. Any group of relays can be associated with a channel for direct on/off control or pattern (scene) control via a simple programming sequence using the relay and channel override pushbuttons and LED displays.
i. Relay group status for each channel shall be provided through bi-color operation of the LED indicators. Solid red indicates that all relays in the group are on, solid green indicates that the group is in a mixed state, and
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 12
blinking green indicates that the relays have blink warned and are currently timing out.
j. Each relay and channel terminal block shall provide a 24V pilot light signal. It shall be possible to configure the system for support for any Class 2 pilot light voltage with the use of an auxiliary power supply. k. Single-pole latching relays with modular plug-in design. Relays shall provide the following ratings and features:
1) Electrical:
(a) 20 amp ballast at 277V
(b) 20 amp ballast at 347V
(c) 20amp tungsten at 120V
(d) 20 amp resistive at 347V
(e) 1.5 HP motor at 120V
(f) 14,000 amp short circuit current rating (SCCR) at 347V (g) Relays shall be specifically UL listed for control of plug- loads
2) Mechanical:
(a) Replaceable, ½” KO mounting with removable Class 2
wire harness.
(b) Actuator on relay housing provides manual override and visual status indication, accessible from Class 2 section of panel.
(c) Dual line and load terminals each support two #14 - #12 solid or stranded conductors.
(d) Tested to 300,000 mechanical on/off cycles.
3) Isolated low voltage contacts provide for true relay status l. Power supply shall be a multi-voltage transformer assembly with rated power to supply all electronics, occupancy sensors, switches, pilot lights, and photocells as necessary to meet the project requirements. Power supply to have internal over-current protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor protection.
m. Lighting control panels shall be WattStopper model LILM8, LILM24 or LILM48 as shown on the plans.
B. BACnet® BASED DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS
The lighting control panel shall support digital communications to facilitate the extension of control to include interoperation with building automation systems and
1. The panel shall have provision for an individual BACnet device ID. The device ID description property shall be writable via the network to allow unique identification of the lighting control panel on the network.
2. The panel shall support MS/TP MAC addresses in the range of 0 127 and
baud rates of 9600k, 38400k and 76800k bits per second.
3. Lighting control relays shall be controllable as binary output objects in the instance range of 1 - 48. The state of each relay shall be readable and writable by the BAS via the object present value property.
4. Lighting control relays shall report their true on/off state as binary input objects in the instance range of 1 - 48.
5. The eight channel groups associated with the panel shall be represented by binary value objects in the instance range of 1
8. The occupancy state of each
channel group shall be readable and writable by the BAS via the object present value property. Commanding 1 to a channel group will put all relays associated with the channel into the normal hours mode. Commanding 0 or NULL shall put the relays into the after-hours mode.
6. Setup and commissioning of the panel shall not require manufacturer-specific software or configuration tools of any kind. All configuration of the lighting control
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 13
panel shall be performed using standard BACnet objects or via the on-board LCD display and user keypad. Provide BACnet objects for panel setup and control as follows:
a. Binary output objects in the instance range of 1 - 48 (one per relay) for on/off control of relays.
b. Binary value objects in the instance range of 1 - 8 (one per channel) for normal hours/after-hours schedule control.
c. Binary input objects in the instance range of 1 - 48 (one per relay) for reading true on/off state of the relays.
d. Analog value objects in the instance range of 1 - 48 (one per relay) shall assign relays to channel groups in the range of 1 -
8. e. Binary value objects in the instance range of 101 - 108 (one per channel group) shall assign the channel to follow auto-on or manual-on mode when transitioning to occupied.
f. Analog value objects in the instance range of 101 - 108 (one per channel group) shall assign a blink warn time value to each channel. A value of 5 shall activate the blink warn feature for the channel and set a 5-minute grace time period. A value of 250 shall activate the sweep feature for the channel and enable the use of sweep type automatic wall switches. g. Analog value objects in the instance range of 201 - 208 (one per channel) shall assign an after-hours time delay value to the channel in the range of 1 - 240 minutes.
h. Multi-state value objects in the instance range of 1 - 8 (one per channel) shall provide the state of the relays assigned to the channel. Valid states shall be ALL ON, MIXED, BLINK, and ALL OFF.
i. The description property for all objects shall be writable via the network and shall be saved in non-volatile memory within the panel. j. The BO and BV 1 - 8 objects shall support BACnet priority array with a relinquish default of off and after hours respectively.
C. USER INTERFACE
Each lighting control panel shall be supplied with an integral user interface consisting of a keypad and associated OLED display screen. The user interface shall allow setup, configuration, and diagnostics of the panel without the need for software or connection of a computer. The user interface shall have the following functions as a minimum:
1. Set network parameters including panel device ID, MS/TP MAC address, baud rate and max master range.
2. Enter meaningful names for the panel, relays, and channels.
3. View normal hours/after-hours status of each channel.
4. Override the normal hours/after-hours mode for each channel.
5. View the 16 priority array slots for each channel and relay.
6. Program the schedule response for each channel as:
a. Automatic-on or manual-on
b. Enable/disable blink warn.
c. Enter override time delay as 0 (none) to 240 minutes.
D. SCHEDULE, GROUP, AND PHOTOCELL CONTROL OF RELAYS
The lighting control panel shall support schedule, group, and photocell control functions via the network as configured in the optional Segment Manager controller or building automation system. The lighting control panel shall be fully compatible with building automation systems that are BACnet compliant. See related specification sections for additional information on interfacing the lighting control panel(s) to the building automation system.
E. BROWSER-BASED PROGRAMMING AND CONTROL
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 14
The digital segment manager shall be a compact controller capable of hosting the schedule, photocell, and group relay control functions for a network of LILM series lighting control panels. The segment manager shall provide the following features:
1. Provision for 1 to 3 separate network segments to facilitate efficient network wire routing.
2. Compact housing with screw tab mounts for surface installation and integral DIN rail mounting slot for NEMA 1 installation in the LMSM-ENC1 enclosure.
3. Web browser-based user interface; shall not require the installation of any lighting control software.
4. User interface accessible form most smart phone browsers when Internet connected.
5. Login security access control restricting some users to view-only or other limited operations.
6. Automatic discovery of the lighting control panels.
7. Familiar navigation-tree-based browsing to individual lighting control panels.
8. View/override current status of channels and relays.
9. Assign relays to channels.
10. Set channel operating parameters:
a. Automatic-on or manual-on operation.
b. Enable/disable blink warn
c. Override duration time, 0 (none) to 240 minutes.
d. AS-100 automatic wall switch operation mode.
11. Create and run schedules:
a. Normal hours/after-hours schedules for channels.
b. On/Off schedules for relays.
c. Support for a minimum of 100 unique schedules, each with up to four time events per day.
d. Support annual schedules, holiday schedules and unique date-bound schedules.
e. Ethernet connectivity for user access via direct-wired connection, LAN/WAN, or Internet connection.
f. BACnet IP connectivity for connection to building automation systems. g. Segment manager shall be WattStopper LMSM-201 with one network segment or LMSM-603 with support for three network segments.
2.13 EMERGENCY LIGHTING
A. Emergency Lighting Control Unit – A UL 924 listed device that monitors a switched circuit providing normal lighting to an area. The unit provides normal ON/OFF control of emergency lighting along with the normal lighting. Upon normal power failure the emergency lighting circuit will close, forcing the emergency lighting ON until normal power is restored. Features include:
1. 120/277 volts, 50/60 Hz, 20 amp ballast rating
2. Push to test button
3. Auxiliary contact for remote test or fire alarm system interface B. WattStopper Product Numbers: ELCU-100, ELCU-200.
2.14 WIRING
A. Category 5e plenum rated cable for connecting switches, dimmers and photocells.
B. 22/3 shielded plenum rated cable for building automation system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
DISTRIBUTED DIGITAL LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM 26 09 33 – 15
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. If using wire other than Cat 5e with RJ-45 connectors for connections other than DLM local network, provide detailed point to point wiring diagrams for every termination.
Provide wire specifications and wire colors to simplify contactor termination requirements B. Install the work of this Section in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions unless otherwise indicated.
C. Calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivity to guarantee proper detection of occupants and energy savings.
1. Adjust time delay so that controlled area remains lighted for 5 minutes after occupant leaves area.
D. Provide written or computer-generated documentation on the commissioning of the system including room by room description including:
1. Sensor parameters, time delays, sensitivities, and daylighting setpoints.
2. Sequence of operation, (e.g. manual ON, Auto OFF. etc.)
3. Load Parameters (e.g. blink warning, etc.)
E. Re-commissioning – After 30 days from occupancy re-calibrate all sensor time delays and sensitivities to meet the Owner’s Project Requirements. Provide a detailed report to the Architect / Owner of re-commissioning activity.
3.2 TESTING
A. Test light fixtures and control devices per the test procedures described in the California Energy Commissions Building Energy Efficiency Standards.
3.3 FACTORY SERVICES [OPTIONAL]
A. Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's factory authorized representative shall start up and verify a complete fully functional system.
B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with three weeks written notice of the system start up and adjustment date.
C. Upon completion of the system start up, the factory-authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel on the adjustment and maintenance of the system.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 19 – 1
SECTION 26 28 19
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes fusible and non-fusible switches.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.
2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts Maximum).
B. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. ANSI/NETA ATS - 2017Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit switch ratings and enclosure dimensions.
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of enclosed switches and ratings of installed fuses.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square D.
B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R fuses.
D. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from [steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 19 – 2
E. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square D.
B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in OFF position.
C. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, to meet conditions. Fabricate enclosure from [steel finished with manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1.
2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R.
D. Furnish switches with entirely copper current carrying parts.
2.3 SWITCH RATINGS
A. Switch Rating: Horsepower rated for AC or DC as indicated on Drawings.
B. Short Circuit Current Rating:
1. Non-Fused Switches: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes.
2. Fused Switches: UL listed for 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes when used with or protected by Class H or K fuses (30-600 ampere).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned enclosed switches.
B. Maintain access to existing enclosed switches and other installations remaining active and requiring access. Modify installation or provide access panel.
C. Clean and repair existing enclosed switches to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install enclosed switches plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29.
B. Install fuses for fusible disconnect switches. Refer to Section 26 28 13 for product requirements.
C. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53.
D. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 28 19 – 3
A. Provide visual and mechanical inspections per NETA ATS 7.5.1.1.A.
B. Perform tests per NETA ATS 7.5.1.1.B
3.4 INDEPENDENT TESTING ORGANIZATION AND PERSONNEL
A. Obtain the services of an independent third party testing organization to perform electrical tests.
B. Independent testing organization and personnel shall meet the requirements of NETA ATS 3.1 and 3.2.
C. Provide written test results and a final report of electrical tests per NETA ATS 5.4 to Architect.
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 – 1
SECTION 26 51 00
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.
2. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratory
1. UL 8750-09 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard product of manufacturer.
B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
C. Provide lighting fixtures complete with lamps, completely wired, controlled, and securely attached to supports.
D. Contractor shall provide entire lighting specification (including fixture catalog cuts and sketches) for each specified manufacturer with complete information about the fixtures they will supply.
E. Type of fixtures shall be as indicated alphanumerically and as specified.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
1.5 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR LED LUMINAIRES
A. Product Description: Complete interior luminaire assemblies, with features, option s, and accessories as scheduled.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 – 2
B. General:
1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.
2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)- compliant.
3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.
b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.) c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz.
d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.90.
f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.
g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.
h. LED driver shall have Class A sound rating.
4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.
b. Minimum CRI 90 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.
d. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
5. LED lamps shall be capable of continuous dimming, without flicker or noise, from 1-100 percent.
C. LED Downlights:
1. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.
D. LED Troffers:
1. LED drivers, modules, and reflector shall be accessible, serviceable, and replaceable from below the ceiling.
2. Housing, LED driver, and LED module shall be products of the same manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires, lamps, and accessories.
B. Extend existing interior luminaire installations using materials and methods compatible with existing installations as specified.
C. Clean and repair existing interior luminaires to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide mounting accessories as required for ceiling construction. Fixture catalog numbers do not necessarily denote specific mounting accessories for type of ceiling in which a fixture may be installed.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 – 3
B. Provide adequate and sturdy support for each lighting fixture. Verify weight and mounting method of fixtures and furnish and install suitable supports. Fixture mounting assemblies shall comply with local seismic codes and regulations.
C. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Install pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height.
D. Support luminaires independent of ceiling framing.
E. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on Reflected Ceiling Plan.
F. Install surface mounted luminaires plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement.
G. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface-mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure.
H. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below.
I. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating.
J. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place.
K. Install wall-mounted luminaires at height as indicated on Drawings.
L. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.
M. Connect luminaires to branch circuit outlets provided under Section 26 05 33 using flexible conduit not exceeding 6 feet.
N. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire.
O. Install specified LED diodes in each luminaire.
P. Lighting fixtures recessed in ceilings which have a fire resistive rating of 1 hour or more shall be enclosed in a box which has a fire resistive rating equal to that of the ceiling.
Q. Ground and bond interior luminaires in accordance with Section 26 05 26.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and adjust luminaries as directed.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures.
B. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
INTERIOR LIGHTING 26 51 00 – 4
C. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
END OF SECTION
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 – 1
SECTION 26 56 00
EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes exterior luminaries, poles, and accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratory
1. UL 8750-09 - .Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Sources for Use in Lighting Products.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire not standard Product of manufacturer.
B. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.
C. Submit site photometric plan showing maintained footcandle levels at 20 foot increments.
Include building mounted, pole mounted and bollard fixtures. Plan shall extend 15 feet beyond property line and show footcandle levels at property line and 15 feet beyond property line.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years [documented] experience.
B. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI O5.1.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LED LUMINARIES
A. Product Description: Complete exterior luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as scheduled.
B. General:
1. LED light fixtures shall be in accordance with IES, NFPA, UL, as shown on the drawings, and as specified.
2. LED light fixtures shall be Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS)- compliant.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 – 2
3. LED drivers shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Minimum efficiency: 85% at full load.
b. Minimum Operating Ambient Temperature: -20˚ C. (-4˚ F.) c. Input Voltage: 120 - 277V (±10%) at 60 Hz.
d. Integral short circuit, open circuit, and overload protection. e. Power Factor: ≥ 0.90.
f. Total Harmonic Distortion: ≤ 20%.
g. Comply with FCC 47 CFR Part 15.
4. LED modules shall include the following features unless otherwise indicated:
a. Comply with IES LM-79 and LM-80 requirements.
b. Minimum CRI 90 and color temperature 3000˚ K unless otherwise specified in LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
c. Minimum Rated Life: 50,000 hours per IES L70.
d. Light output lumens as indicated in the LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify foundations are ready to receive fixtures.
3.2 EXISTING WORK
A. Disconnect and remove abandoned exterior luminaries.
B. Extend existing exterior luminaire installations using materials and methods [compatible with existing installations, or] as specified.
C. Clean and repair existing exterior luminaries to remain or to be reinstalled.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation.
B. Measure illumination levels [to verify conformance with performance requirements].
C. Take measurements during night sky, without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Aim and adjust luminaries to provide illumination levels and distribution.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Clean finishes and touch up damage.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
EXTERIOR LIGHTING 26 56 00 – 3
END OF SECTION
This page intentionally left blank.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 1
SECTION 27 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes, but is not necessarily limited to , common standards and procedures for the Communications Work.
B. This Section outlines areas of responsibility between Owner, Architect, and Contractor.
C. Owner will assist with a collaborative process to determine the most cost effective and efficient means to reach the common goal of providing communications within the facility for the project, including assessing user needs and assessing required pathways. The Owner is available upon request to assist at no additional cost to the project. It is incumbent upon the construction team management to approach and engage the Owner at the appropriate times for collaboration.
D. As part of the project, the construction team must design, engineer, and provide c omplete, all means of support, suspension, attachment, fastening, bracing, and restraint (hereinafter “support") of the Communications Systems; and provide engineering of such support by parties licensed to perform work of this type in the project jurisdiction.
1.2 ITEMS PROVIDED BY OTHERSWNER
A. Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) support services B. IT project management
C. Submittal approvals
D. Network equipment
E. 802.11 Wireless Access Point hardware
F. Rack and Stack
G. Plug Pack Distribution (Pre-terminated switch port cabling provided and installed by the Owner) H. Patch Cords and Patching
I. IT UPS System (installation by construction team)
J. PDU Power distribution Equipment
K. VOIP Router, Voice Gateway, VOIP equipment
L. Camera NVR/Server
M. Overhead Paging Amplifier
N. TV Distribution Amplifier
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 2
O. Closet Cleaning postproduction
1.3 ITEMS PROVIDED BY CONSTRUCTION TEAM
A. Building Drawings and Floor Plans
B. Site Plans
C. Furniture Plans
D. As-Built Drawing Submittals
1. As-built drawing per section 1.10
2. Cabling Schedule
3. Desktop Inventory Sheet
a. Spread sheet listing cable number and location for every cable installed 1) Cable number; room number, wall (north, south, east, west) E. Attachments to structure
F. In wall cabling
G. In wall cabling supports
H. Cabling test results
I. Horizontal cable, jacks, faceplates, surface mount boxes, cable trays, termination hardware, and all materials needed for a complete horizontal cabling plant as defined in the Section and associated Sections and the construction documents not otherwise listed for provision by the Owner.
J. Construction Clean Closet Cleaning
1.4 RELATED SECTIONS
A. 27 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS B. 27 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS C. 27 05 33 CONDUITS AND BACKBOXES FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS D. 27 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
E. 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING
1.5 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. Reference to codes, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies shall mean that latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid. Consider such codes or standards a part of this Specification as though fully repeated herein.
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 3
2. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)
3. Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI)
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
7. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
8. Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
B. Codes: Perform Work executed under this Section in accordance wit h applicable requirements of the latest edition of governing codes, rules and regulations including but not limited to the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not:
1. United States Department of Labor (DOL) Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR)
2. Part 1910, “Occupational Safety and Health Standards”
3. California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 24, California Building Standards Code Part 2, Basic Building Regulations and Part 3, California Electrical Code (CEC).
4. 2022 California Building Code (CBC).
5. 2022 California Fire Code (CFC).
6. 2012 California Mechanical Code (CMC).
7. National, State and any other binding building and fire codes.
8. FCC Regulations:
a. Part 15 – Radio Frequency Devices & Radiation Limits b. Part 68 – Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network
9. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL): Applicable listing and ratings, including but not limited to the following standards:
a. UL 444: Communications Cables
b. UL 497: Protectors for Paired-Conductor Communication Circuits. c. UL 1651: Optical Fiber Cable
d. UL 1690: Data-Processing Cable
e. UL 1963: Communications-Circuit Accessories
f. UL 2024A: Optical Fiber Cable Routing Assemblies.
10. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-D Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard.
11. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-E Commercial Building Stand ard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.
12. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-B Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
13. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-C Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings.
14. ANSI/J-STD-607-D Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications.
15. ANSI/TIA/EIA-758 Customer-Owner Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard. a. TIA/EIA-758-1 Addendum No. 1
16. EIA testing standards.
17. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 4
a. ANSI/ICEA S -80-576-2002 Category 1 & 2 Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for Use in Communications Wiring Systems
b. ANSI/ICEA S-83-596-2016 Fiber Optic Premises Distribution Cable c. ANSI/ICEA S-87-640-2016 Fiber Optic Outside Plant Communications Cable d. ANSI/ICEA S-90-661-2012 Category 3, 5, & 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cable for Use In General Purpose and LAN Communication Wiring Systems e. ICEA S-104-696-2019 Standard for Indoor-Outdoor Optical Cable
18. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)
1.6 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
B. AFC Above Finished Ceiling
C. AFF Above the Finished Floor
D. BDF Building Distribution Frame – See Telecommunications Room (TR) E. BLDG Building
F. CAT Category (Related to network cable types)
G. DIV Division
H. (E) Existing
I. ER IT Equipment Room – See Telecommunications Room (TR) J. GE Grounding Equalizer – Part of the Telecom Grounding System K. HR Homerun
L. ID Inside Diameter
M. IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame – See Telecommunications Room (TR) N. IT UC Davis Health IT Department (also UC, UCDH, UCD IT, IT Facilities) O. LAN Local Area Network
P. MAX Maximum
Q. NIC Not in Contract
R. OD Outside Diameter
S. TBB Telecom Bonding Backbone – Part of the Telecom Grounding System T. TGB Telecommunications Ground Busbar
U. TMGB Telecommunications Main Ground Busbar
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 5
V. TR Telecommunications Room, TR may also be used interchangeably with ER, IDF, MDF, or Communications Room
W. TYP Typical
X. UCD UC Davis Health IT Department (also UC, UCDH, UCD IT, IT Facilities) Y. UFE University Furnished Equipment
Z. UON Unless Otherwise Noted
1.7 DEFINITIONS
A. Telecommunications Room (TR) – An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable, terminations, and cross-connects. The room is the recognized cross -connect between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling.
B. Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) – See Telecommunications Room (TR) C. Entrance Facility (EF) (Telecommunications) – An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables (including antennae) inc luding the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the entrance room or space.
D. Pathway – A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable.
E. Infection Control – Clinical Environment Infection Control or ICRA F. “Cabling”: A combination of cables, wire, cords, and connecting hardware [e.g., cables, conductor terminations, connectors, outlets, patch panels, blocks, and labeling].
G. “Identifier”: A unique code assigned to an element of the telecommunications infrastructure that links it to its corresponding record.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor Firm Qualifications:
1. All work for the Communications ( low voltage ) Infrastructure installation shall be self - performed by the Communications Contractor; subcontractors shall not be allowed under the Communications Contractor.
B. Communications Contractor shall:
1. Be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the installation and testing of the specified communications equipment and infrastructure.
2. Be licensed to install low voltage electronic cabling systems in the State of California where applicable (C7 License).
C. Communications Contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful installation of data infrastructure systems:
1. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful low voltage communications infrastructure system installation projects completed within the past three years.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 6
D. Contractor Key Personnel Qualifications:
1. Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the application, installation and testing of the specified low voltage communications systems, equipment and infrastructure. There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this project depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided.
2. Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful low voltage communications systems, equipment and infrastructure within the past three years.
E. A Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) shall be employed by the Design Builder and directly engaged in the project for all Communications Infrastructure design and installation efforts.
1. The RCDD shall be a direct employee of the Communications Contractor, within the Design Build team structure.
2. The RCDD shall be required to have oversight and supervision of the entire Communications Infrastructure installation process and quality control.
3. The RCDD shall be the Des ign Builder's Designer of Record for the Communications Infrastructure scope of work.
4. RCDD direct responsibilities shall include but may not be limited to: Thorough coordination with Owner regarding all design and installation efforts related to the projec t. A Pre- construction coordination meeting and site inspection with Owner prior to beginning any work. Oversight of Communications installation efforts, development of shop drawings and assembly of product data submittals. Quality control review and stampi ng of finalized Communications as -built drawings for submittal to Owner. Quality control review of Communications systems installation throughout the entire construction phase, to ensure all work is performed in compliance with approved construction drawings.
F. Critical on -site quality control installation reviews to be conducted in conjunction with Owner technical staff shall include but may not be limited to:
1. Validation of design to conform with Infection Control guidelines required as it applies with the type of structure and services to be provided in each specific area.
2. Verifying proper installation of all Communications cable tray, backbone conduits, device back boxes, conduit infrastructure and cabling pathways. Site inspection and sign-off must be performed prior to concealing conduit infrastructure and prior to the installation of any low-volt cabling.
3. Verifying proper installation of all Communications cabling. Site inspection and sign -off must be performed prior to closing-up associated accessible ceilings.
4. Verifying the layout and installation of all equipment and cabling within the Telecom Rooms, throughout the duration of the construction phase.
G. Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) Registered cabling Installers, Technician Level. Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful cabling system installations for each of the key personnel in an environment resembling that which is being bid upon.
1. In lieu of BICSI certification, supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum of three years’ experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components. The personnel on site performing work pertaining to this job shall be certified on the system being installed.
They shall have factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 7
2. Submit documentation for a minim um of three and a maximum of fiv e successful cabling system installations for each of the key personnel in an environment resembling that which is being bid upon. Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this project. Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using optical fiber and copper telecommunications cabling systems.
3. All of the existing telecommunications s ystem installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full-time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this project.
4. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project Owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity.
H. Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the Communications Contractor or have a commitment to the Communications Contractor to work on this project. All key persons shall be employed by the Communications Contractor at the date of issuance of this project, or if not, have a commitment to the Communications Contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Owner’s Representative.
1. Note that only the key personnel approved by the Owner’s Representative in the successful proposal shall perfor m work on this project's low voltage systems, equipment, and infrastructure. Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract, as they functioned in the offered successful experience. Any substitutions for the Communications Contractor's key personnel require approval from the Owner’s Representative.
I. Designated Supervisor: Designate which key person will serve as a designated supervisor for the project. This supervisor shall be present and responsible for the project site during all phases of installation and testing of the Work in this Section. This supervisor shall be the same individual through the execution of the Work unless illness, loss of personnel, or other circumstances reasonably beyond the control of the Contractor intervene.
J. Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful low voltage systems, equipment, and infrastructure installations for each of the key personnel.
K. Documentation for each key person shall inc lude at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the low voltage communications systems, equipment and infrastructure proposed for this project. Include specific experience in installing and testing communications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using systems and equipment substantially similar to those specified for this project.
L. All the existing low voltage communications systems, equipment and infrastructure installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full -time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this project.
M. Provide the name and role of the key person, the title, location, and completed installation date of the referenced project, the referenced project Owner point of contact information including name, organization, title, and telephone number, and generally, the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 8
1.9 SUBMITTALS
A. All Submittals shall be provided electronically in PDF format. All Drawing Submittals shall be provided in PDF and AutoCAD (latest version) DWG format.
B. Submittals shall be organized in a coordinated package complete with all information specified herein. Incomplete or uncoordinated submittals will be returned with no review action.
C. Contractor shall submit the following items:
1. Contractor Key Personnel and Certifications
2. Complete Bill of Materials (BOM) List
3. Manufacturer Product Data Sheets, as defined below
4. Shop Drawings, as defined below
5. Proposed Installation Schedule
6. Cabling Certification Test Plan and proposed test equipment D. Manufacturer Product Data Submittals shall include:
1. Submit product data sheets for all equipment being provided.
2. Collate in sequence by Section Number, and clearly mark proposed product on data sheet.
Include Safety Data Sheet, where applicable.
3. Clearly identify any proposed product substitutions or known deviations.
E. Precede each submittal book with a summary TOC. per example schedule below:
1. Specification Section
2. Drawing Reference
3. Manufacturers Model No.
F. The following is a general summary list of Submittal items required to be delivered at 30-day burn- in period.
1. As part of project close-out activities, Contractor shall submit Record Documents for review and approval by the Owner.
2. All Record Documents shall be provided electronically in PDF format. All Record Document Drawings shall be provided in PDF and AutoCAD (latest version) DWG format.
1.10 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor shall submit the following items:
1. Record As -Built Shop Drawings indicating the final, 'as -built' condition of all associated equipment, infrastructure, and work.
B. Shop Drawing Submittals shall include:
1. Drawing index/symbol/schedule sheet.
2. Clearly indicate all new work versus existing work.
3. Site Plans, Floor Plans, and Reflected Ceiling (work 7' AFF+) Plans
4. Drawings shall be developed in AutoCAD .DWG format, utilizing most current architectural backgrounds available for the project.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 9
5. All drawings shall be properly scaled.
6. Indicate all device locations and types. Include addressing for all network outlets (as
7. Indicate all cabling routes, types and quantities.
8. Indicate all conduit routing, quantities, sizes, and wire fill. Indicate basket tray and J -hook routes.
9. Indicate fire stopping requirements for all penetrations.
10. Indicate 'cable bundle groups' no larger than:
a. CAT5e – 52
b. CAT6 – 64
c. CAT6A – 74
11. When bundling low voltage cabling together the lowest common denominator determines the largest cable group allowed unless the cable is LP listed.
C. Riser Diagrams indicating:
1. Backbone cabling and termination locations. Associated cabling pathways, sizes and cable fill. Telecommunications Grounding System.
D. Enlarged Room Plans and Elevations indicating:
E. Provide dimensioned drawings for all telecommunications rooms. Complete, dimensioned rack and wall elevations of all equipment. Consideration must be given to equipment heights within.
Plywood backboards and grounding equipment.
F. Racks, cabinets, cable tray, ladder rack, wire management. Termination equipment for all copper and fiber cabling. Conduit and cable entrance points and fire stopping. Electrical panels, power circuits and HVAC provisions.
G. Ensure coordinated arrangement of equipment with other trades. Typical Device Installation Details indicating: J-hooks, conduit, cable tray, and associated support systems. Network outlet faceplate layout and wiring terminations. Device back box and conduit rough-in requirements.
H. Details of other associated devices and equipment.
I. The shop drawing package must be stamped and signed by a Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD). Signatures by a Professional Engineer (PE) licensed in the project jurisdiction for work of this type as required by the AHJ.
J. Cable Certification Test Results. Submit electronically and include associated software license as applicable.
K. Completed punch list reports.
L. Manufacturer Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals.
M. Warranty information.
N. Keys and any portable equipment.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 10
1.11 WARRANTY SERVICE
A. Closeout Submittals, Warranties and Guarantees, provide the following.
1. Response Time: Provide a qualified technician familiar with the work at the project site within four hours after receipt of a notice of malfunction. Provide the Owner's Representative with telephone number attended 10 hours a day, five days a week, to be called in the event of a malfunction.
2. Provide all Warrantees as defined in each Communication Systems Section.
B. PanGen Structured Cabling Solutions System Warranty
1. Contractor shall provide a Panduit Certification Plus System Warranty on all installed copper and fiber permanent links. Such warranty shall provide a complete system warranty to guarantee high end-to-end performance for all applications designed to operate over the class of cabling installed. The guarantee shall include all connectivity components and cable within the permanent link and cover the system for duration of 25 years.
PART 2 - MATERIALS
2.1 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PRODUCTS SUMMARY
A. The following is a general summary list of Communications Systems equipment, components, and cabling required for the project. This is not intended to be a comprehensive list of materials.
See additional Sections for complete materials requirements.
B. Racks: Cooper B-line SB85219096FB (seismic). Standard racks shall be B-Line SB556096XUFB.
Racks will be eight foot for new builds and remodels where space is available. Seven-foot racks will be used as an alternate where space is not available for taller racks.
C. Telecommunications Ground Bar (TGB) CPI_Mfg.Part:40153-012 or equal.
D. Modular Jack CAT6A
1. Panduit Mini-Com CJ6X88TGVL or equal.
2. Colored Icons as needed per City of Sacramento standards E. Copper cabling, Category 6A (Data)
1. High Speed, TIA Category 6A cabling, Plenum Rated
2. General Cable GenSpeed 6A Part No. 71518XX or equal. a. Coordinate cable jacket colors with City of Sacramento.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES
A. Provide 36" of working clearance in front and back of racks and electronic equipment.
B. Walls shall be covered with fire-resistant treated p lywood, and all surfaces sealed to mitigate airborne dust.
WINN PARK TENANT IMPROVEMENT
100% CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS
AN-23016
11.30.2023
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS 27 05 00 – 11
C. Lighting shall be provided with a minimum of 500 lux (50 foot -candles) measured at any point in the TR, including 6 inches above the finished floor. Photometrics shall consider position of racks and equipment and light fixtures shall be placed to prevent shadows between rows of equipment racks.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Conditions: Verify co nditions, provided under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.